Ford 2013 F 150 Owners Manual

13f12om3e 2013 Ford F150 Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

: Ford Ford-2013-Ford-F-150-Owners-Manual-815475 ford-2013-ford-f-150-owners-manual-815475 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 592

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2013 F-150 Owner’s Manual

DL3J 19A321 AA

|

2013 F-150 Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com

ford.ca

February 2013

|

Third Printing

|

Owner’s Manual

|

F-150

|

Litho in U.S.A.

Table of Contents

1

Introduction
Child Safety
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seat positioning . . . . .
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing child safety seats .
Child safety locks . . . . . . . .

9
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

18
.20
.20
.22
.25
.37

Safety Belts
Fastening the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime .
Safety belt-minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

38
.40
.44
.45
.45
.48

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

Personal Safety System
Supplementary Restraints System
Driver and passenger airbags . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety canopy curtain airbags . . . .
Crash sensors and airbag indicator
Airbag disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

50
.52
.60
.61
.63
.64

Keys and Remote Control
General information on radio frequencies.
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a lost key or remote control. . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

65
.65
.66
.66
.70

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

2

Table of Contents

MyKey
Settings, MyKey . . . . . .
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . .
System status. . . . . . . .
Remote start, MyKey . .
Troubleshooting, MyKey

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

71
.71
.72
.73
.74
.74
.75

Locks
76
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
SecuriCode™ keyless entry keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Security
82
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Steering Wheel
85
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Pedals
90
Adjustable pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Wipers and Washers
91
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Rain-sensing wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Lighting
Lighting control . . . . . . . . .
Autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument lighting dimmer.
Daytime running lamps . . . .
Front fog lamps . . . . . . . . .
Direction indicators . . . . . .
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

93
.93
.94
.94
.95
.95
.95
.96

Table of Contents

3

Windows and Mirrors
98
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Interior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Instrument Cluster
106
Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Warning lamps and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Audible warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Information Displays
113
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Audio System
AM/FM stereo. . . . . . . . . . .
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3
MyFord™ system . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary input jack . . . . . .
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite radio information . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

135
.137
.138
.142
.148
.149
.150

Climate Control
153
Manual heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Dual automatic temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

4

Table of Contents

Seats
Sitting in the correct position
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . .
Manual seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory function . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated and cooled seats . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

163
.163
.164
.168
.169
.170
.172
.176
.177

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
180
Car2U® home automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
HomeLink® wireless control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Auxiliary Power Points

190

Storage Compartments
193
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Starting and Stopping the Engine
194
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Fuel and Refueling
200
Fuel quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Transmission
210
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
220
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Table of Contents

5

Brakes
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

234
.234
.235
.235

Traction Control
236
Traction Control™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Stability Control
237
AdvanceTrac® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Terrain Response
240
Hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Parking Aids
242
Sensing system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Rear-view camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Cruise Control

248

Driving Aids
250
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Load Carrying
252
Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Towing
Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer brake controller-integrated .
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational towing . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

267
.267
.276
.283
.284

Driving Hints
287
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Snowplowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

6

Table of Contents

Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance .
Hazard warning flashers . . .
Fuel cut-off switch . . . . . . .
Jump-starting the vehicle . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

294
.294
.296
.296
.297

Customer Assistance
300
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Fuses
308
Changing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Maintenance
General information . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the hood . . . .
Under hood overview . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid check
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid check . . . . . .
Fuel filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the wiper blades . . . . . .
Air filter(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the headlamps . . . . . . . .
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

319
.319
.320
.321
.325
.325
.326
.332
.333
.333
.333
.334
.334
.337
.338
.342
.343

Table of Contents

7

Vehicle Care
Cleaning products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens
Cleaning the alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

350
.350
.350
.352
.352
.352
.353
.354
.355
.358
.359

Wheels and Tires
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel lug nut torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

362
.365
.381
.387
.396
.396

Capacities and Specifications
Engine specifications . . . . . . .
Engine drivebelt . . . . . . . . . . .
Part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification number .
Vehicle certification label . . . .
Transmission code designation.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

397
.397
.397
.405
.406
.407
.407

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

Accessories
408
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Ford Extended Service Plan

411

Scheduled Maintenance
414
Normal scheduled maintenance and log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

8

Table of Contents

SYNC®
435
Pairing your phone for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
911 Assist™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Vehicle Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Privacy Information . . . . . . . .
Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to music . . . . . . . . .
Phone features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate features . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation system. . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

484
.489
.490
.496
.518
.525
.538
.550
.553

Appendices

565

Index

584

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2013

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Introduction

9

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time
to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A. Right-hand side
A
B. Left-hand side

B
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

10

Introduction

SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description
Safety alert

Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Brake
fluid – non
petroleum
base
Check fuel
cap

Symbol Description
See Owner’s
Manual
Battery

Symbol Description
Anti-lock
braking
system
Battery acid

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Cruise control

Child seat
lower anchor

Engine air
filter

Engine
coolant

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Engine
coolant
temperature
Fan warning

Fasten safety
belt

Front airbag

Child seat
tether anchor

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Do not open
when hot

Front fog
lamps

Introduction
Symbol Description
Fuel pump
reset

Symbol Description
Fuse
compartment

Heated rear
window

Interior
luggage
compartment
release
Low tire
pressure
warning
Parking aid
system

Lighting
control
Panic alarm

Power
steering fluid
Service
engine soon
Windshield
defrost and
demist

11
Symbol Description
Hazard
warning
flasher
Jack

Power
windows front
and rear
Side airbag

Windshield
washer and
wiper

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintain
correct fluid
level
Parking brake
system
Power
window
lockout
Stability
control

12

Introduction

DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• How fast the vehicle was travelling;
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Introduction

13

Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and Information privacy
below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such
special equipment, can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada
do not access event data recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law
enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate
the 911 Assist feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more
information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

14

Introduction

Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC® chapter
for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to
Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Introduction

15

REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking
for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years
of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using
parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner’s manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements
for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance.
During vehicle development, we validate that these parts deliver the
intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure
you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered
by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

16

Introduction

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate your vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Snowplow section in the Driving Hints chapter.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Introduction

17

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options
that are described in this owner’s manual. A market unique supplement
may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
owner’s manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. See this owner’s manual for all other required
information and warnings.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

18

Child Safety

GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other
safety organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your
local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, or
locate your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 1–800–333–0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Infants or
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
toddlers
less (generally age four or
younger).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

for Children
Recommended
restraint type
Use a child safety
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler
seat).

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
children
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Larger
Children who have outgrown
children
or no longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at
least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by
child restraint manufacturer).

19
for Children
Recommended
restraint type
Use a
belt-positioning
booster seat.

Use a vehicle
safety belt having
the lap belt snug
and low across the
hips, shoulder belt
centered across
the shoulder and
chest, and seat
back upright.

• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front
Passenger Sensing System in the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter for more information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

20

Child Safety

CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated
and restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your
vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or
utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does
not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

21

WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X.
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Restraint
Child anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
Type
Weight and
only)
top
(lower
top
tether anchors
tether
anchor and top
anchor)
tether
anchor)
Rear-facing Up to
child seat 48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
ForwardUp to
facing child 48 lb
X
X
X
seat
(21 kg)
Over
Forwardfacing child 48 lb
X
X
seat
(21 kg)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

22

Child Safety

Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon
which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
• Can the child sit all the way
back against their vehicle seat
with knees bent comfortably at
the edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

23

Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

24

Child Safety

Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster
that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across
the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close
to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across
the child’s hips.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used,
placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster
seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than
this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

25

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder
belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place your vehicle seat back in the upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5.
This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

26

Child Safety

Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route
the tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

27

4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.

Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

28

Child Safety

This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps
to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.

To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Seating Position)
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat,
move seat all the way back.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
front of an active airbag.
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
center seating position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

29

The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap and shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the
shoulder belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt.
1. Position the child safety seat in
the center front seat.

2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

3. While holding both shoulder and
lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according
to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

30

Child Safety
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

5. While pushing down with your
knee on the child seat pull up
on the shoulder belt portion to
tighten the lap belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.

6. Allow the safety belt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to
securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
8. Before placing the child into the
child seat, forcibly pull the child
seat forward and back to make sure
that the seat is held securely in
place. To check this, grab the seat
at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward
and back. There should be no more
than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of
movement for proper installation.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

31

9. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap
and shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt
tight during a collision.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed.
In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral
to a Child Passenger Safety Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat if the
lower anchors are not used. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top
tether strap has been provided with your child seat. See Using Tether
Straps in this chapter for more information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

32

Child Safety

Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for child seat
installation at the following seating positions (LATCH is not available on
F150 Regular cab) :
• F150 SuperCab and SuperCrew

The lower LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child safety
seats with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

33

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced
at least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
25.7 inches (652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (280 mm) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing)
can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat
is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor.
Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

34

Child Safety

The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the
seat back or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the
seat cushion.
The rear seat in the SuperCab and SuperCrew has three straps along the
top of the seat back that function as both routing loops for the tether
straps and anchor loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• F-150 Regular Cab

• F-150 SuperCrew and SuperCab

Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

35

Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Regular Cab)
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat and
under the head restraint.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seat back.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
• You may need to pull the seat back forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat back is locked in the upright position
before installing the child seat.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Regular Cab passenger and
center seats (located on back
panel)

If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

36

Child Safety

Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (SuperCab and SuperCrew)
There are three loops of webbing
just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear
window). These loops are to be
used as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child
safety seat tether straps.

For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and through the loop
directly behind the child seat.

2. Route the tether strap behind the
head restraint supports to a loop
behind an adjacent seating position,
and hook the strap hook onto the
loop. If using the driver’s side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt
mounting for the center seat.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Child Safety

37

• Always put the tether strap through the routing loop. The head
restraint support post will hold the child seat tightly, but the head
restraint post is not strong enough to hold the child seat during a
collision.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

38

Safety Belts

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

39

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts.
All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts
• shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode (except driver safety
belt)
• height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions
• safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions
• belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position.
• safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety belt warning
light and indicator chime later in this chapter.
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash sensors and airbag indicator in the
Supplemental Restraint System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal
and side crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body when activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

40

Safety Belts

FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

Using the Safety Belt With Cinch Tongue (Front Center Seat)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap and shoulder
safety belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and do not allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

41

Before you can reach and latch a lap and shoulder belt having a cinch
tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it.
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.

3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder
belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the lap and shoulder belt with
a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard,
turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward
movement.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

42

Safety Belts

Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seat back upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips.
The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashs.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

43

All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the
front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
front outboard passenger seating position in a Regular Cab / SuperCab /
SuperCrew or any rear seating position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew.
The optional front seat’s center safety belt has a cinch mechanism.
See Using the Safety Belt With Cinch Tongue (Front Center Seat) in
this chapter. Children 12 years old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seat whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

44

Safety Belts

How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a
safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull on the center button and
slide the height adjuster up or
down.
2. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
PULL

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

45

SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...

Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.

The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.

SAFETY BELT-MINDER®
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s or front passenger’s seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in
need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to front
seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired (warnings for about five
minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other
occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder feature.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

46

Safety Belts

If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the
on position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for about one
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...

Then...
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.

The Belt-Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The Belt-Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

47

Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder® Feature
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate
the Belt-Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder are deactivated and
activated independently. When deactivating or activating one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the
process.
Note: If you are using MyKey®, the Belt-Minder cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled after the use of MyKey®. See the MyKey® chapter.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the transmission selector lever is in position P
• the ignition is off
• the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (about one minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times, ending in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for
three seconds.
4. Within about seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it is
currently disabled.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

48

Safety Belts

CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters
(if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use
in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Personal Safety System

49

PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

50

Supplementary Restraints System

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
crash.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

51

The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that
result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or
swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries, such as
fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle, such as front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy®.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button (if equipped) is pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or
• your vehicle runs out of power.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

52

Supplementary Restraints System

DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near-frontal crashes.

The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
• front passenger sensing system

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

53

Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts,
it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves
on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a crash.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

54

Supplementary Restraints System

If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the
child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving
your vehicle. This provides lap and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. A child or infant
properly restrained in the center front seat should not incur risk of
serious injury from the airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or hang objects
off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place objects
underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center
console (if equipped). Check the passenger airbag status indicator lamp for
proper airbag status. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with
the front passenger seat sensing system.
WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.
WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could affect
the decision of the front passenger sensing system.
The system works with sensors that are part of the passenger’s seat and
safety belt to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and
determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled or not.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

55

High-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which will illuminate
indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is located
by the radio.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on
to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status
indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then turn your vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from your vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn your vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat back in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

56

Supplementary Restraints System

• Restart your vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Empty
Child
Adult

Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator
OFF: Lit
ON: Unlit
OFF: Lit
ON: Unlit
OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit

Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled

Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is
illuminated, the passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to
avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s very
important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can
increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant
slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp
is incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console
(if equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

57

The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the previous list.
To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating
properly, see Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this
chapter.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and adult passengers should check for any objects that may
be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with
the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take the
following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Turn your vehicle off.
• Driver or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in
the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a problem due to the front
passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this owner’s manual.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

58

Supplementary Restraints System

Low-series vehicles (if equipped)

PASS AIRBAG

The front passenger sensing system
uses a pass airbag off indicator which
will illuminate and stay lit to remind
you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp
is located by the radio.

Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, turn your vehicle off, remove the child restraint from your vehicle
and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit..
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the person isn’t
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn your vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

59

• Restart your vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Empty
Child
Adult

Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Unlit

Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled

Note: When the passenger airbag off lamp is illuminated, the passenger
side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s very
important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can
increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant
slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating
properly, see Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this
chapter.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this owner’s manual.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

60

Supplementary Restraints System

SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seat backs (of the front seats), or
in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seat back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag,
as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must
be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs of
the front seats. In certain lateral crashes, the airbag on the side affected
by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact crashes.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

61

The system consists of the
following:
• a tag on the seat back indicating
that side airbags are found on
your vehicle
• side airbags located inside the
seat back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
• front passenger sensing system.
Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY® CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a
deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain
airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags, as you could be
seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

62

Supplementary Restraints System

WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury
or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain
airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the
A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact crashes and rollover events.
The system consists of:
• safety canopy curtain airbags
located above the trim panels
over the front and rear side
windows identified by wording
on the B-pillar trim.

• a flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air
curtain deployment.
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this
chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

63

Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk
of injury. Do not modify the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based on the
type of accident (frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem or light are repaired.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

64

Supplementary Restraints System

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal or
lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (such as crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and
near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts)
unless the crash causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact
crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact
crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Keys and Remote Control

65

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short-distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm
systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

66

Keys and Remote Control

REMOTE CONTROL

CAUTION
TO BE REMOVED

BY CUSTOMER ONLY

Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters.
Use the key blade to start your
vehicle and unlock or lock the
driver door from outside the vehicle.
The transmitter portion functions as
the remote control.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came
with a security label that provides
important key cut information. Keep
the label in a safe place for future
reference.

Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the
back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Keys and Remote Control

67

Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key
1 ring to remove the battery cover (1).
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket (2)
2 from the transmitter if it does not come off
with the battery cover.
3 3. Remove the old battery (3).

4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the integrated
keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Reinstall the rubber gasket.
6. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
The feature allows the remote control to recall the driver seat, power
mirrors, steering column (if equipped) and power adjustable foot pedals
(if equipped) memory positions.
Press the unlock button on the remote control to recall the memory
positions. If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled, the seat will move
to the easy entry position. The seat will move to the driver memory
position when the key is put in the ignition.
Programming Memory to the Transmitter
1. Move the memory features to the desired positions using the
associated controls.
2. Press and hold memory button 1 (on the side of the
driver’s seat) for five seconds. A tone will sound after about
1
two seconds. Continue to hold until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote
control.
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press the unlock button on the
2
remote control.
Repeat this procedure for memory button 2 and a second
remote control if desired.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

68

Keys and Remote Control

Deactivating Memory from the Transmitter
1. Press and hold the desired memory button for five seconds. A tone
will sound after about two seconds. Continue to hold until a second tone
is heard.
2. Within three seconds press the unlock button on the remote control.
Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will sound
and the turn signals will flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your
vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
The remote start button is on the transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside your vehicle.
The transmitter has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate
when the vehicle is remote started. See the Climate Control chapter for
more information. A manual climate control system will run at the setting
it was set to when your vehicle was last turned off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Keys and Remote Control

69

The remote start system will not work if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• you disable the feature
• the hood is not closed
• the transmission is not in P
• the vehicle battery voltage is too low
• your service engine soon light is on.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other.
Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not sound if you do
not follow this sequence.
The label on your transmitter
details the starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:

1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps will flash
twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on.
Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You
can switch it on or off in the information display. See the Information
Displays chapter.
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle.
If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter,
you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle
and press the START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while
applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the
radio will not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on the setting. See the Information Displays
chapter to select the duration of the remote start system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

70

Keys and Remote Control

Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with your vehicle still running to extend the run
time for another remote start duration. If the duration is set to last
10 minutes, the duration will extend by another 10 minutes beginning
after what is left of the first activation time. For example, if your vehicle
had been running from the first remote start for five minutes, your
vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle
shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting
Press the button once. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the
information display. See the Information Display chapter.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from
an authorized dealer. A dealer can program the transmitters to your
vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the Security
chapter for information on programming your transmitters.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyKey

71

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as
administrator keys or admin keys. These can be used to:
• create a MyKey
• program configurable MyKey settings
• clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you can access the following
information using the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles with intelligent access key (push-button start)
keyless start, when both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key
(fob) are present, the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to
start the engine.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user :
• Belt-minder. You cannot disable this feature. The audio system will
mute when the front seat occupants’ safety belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel warning. The low fuel warning is activated earlier, giving
the MyKey user more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on:
parking aid, blind spot information system (BLIS) with cross traffic
alert, lane departure warning and forward collision warning system.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain MyKey settings when
you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the
vehicle. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed.
You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator
pedal or by setting cruise control.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

72

MyKey

• Vehicle speed minders of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90 or 105 km/h). Once
you select a speed, it will be shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message will be shown in
the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac, 911 Assist or the do not disturb feature (if your
vehicle is equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a MyKey.
For Type 1 information displays:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu within the information display, and press
SETUP using the information display button until PRESS RESET
TO CREATE MYKEY displays.
4. Press and release the RESET button. The message HOLD RESET
TO CONFIRM MYKEY will display.
5. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK
THIS AS RESTRICTED displays. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED
AT NEXT START displays, confirming that your key is successfully
created.
Make sure you label your key so you can distinguish it from the admin
keys.
For Type 2 information display controls:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. From the main menu within the information display, use the right
arrow key > or OK to select SETTING and then MYKEY.
4. Press > or OK to select CREATE MYKEY.
5. Hold OK as prompted until you see MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED in the information display screen.
The key is successfully created. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings for the key(s). Refer to the
Programming/Changing Optional Settings section .

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyKey

73

Programming/Changing Optional Settings
Use the information display to access your configurable MyKey settings.
For Type 1 information display settings
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
3. Press and release RESET to display MyKey setup menus.
4. Press SETUP to display the next menu and scroll through your
choices.
5. On any of the menus, press RESET to highlight your choice by using
either of the arrow buttons: < or >.
6. Press SETUP to select your choice. The next configurable setting
will be displayed.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until you are done changing your configurable
settings.
For Type 2 information display settings
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey.
3. Use the arrow buttons < or > to get to a configurable feature.
4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings.
5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the
MyKey. If you switch your ignition off, however, you will need to use an
admin key to clear your MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and
return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display to
do the following:
For Type 1 information display settings:
1. Access the main menu of your information display and press SETUP
until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY displays.
2. Press and release the RESET button. The display will show HOLD
RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL
MYKEYS CLEARED displays.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

74

MyKey

For Type 2 information display settings:
1. Access main menu of your information display and select Settings,
then MyKey.
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED displays .
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the
information display.
MYKEY DISTANCE
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete
the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey.
If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user
is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
NUMBER OF MYKEY(S)
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and
determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY(S)
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use
this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your
vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyKey

75

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition
I cannot create a
MyKey.

I cannot program the
configurable settings.

I cannot clear the
MyKeys.

I lost the only admin
key.
I lost a key.
No MyKey functions
with intelligent access
key (push- button
start).
MyKey distances do
not accumulate.

Potential causes
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle is
the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
• Vehicles with push-button start: The
intelligent access key is not in the backup slot.
The backup slot location information is in
another chapter. See Starting and Stopping
the Vehicle.
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey.
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. Refer to Creating a
MyKey.
• Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
• Program a spare key. See SecuriLock in the
Security.
• An admin fob is present at engine start.
• No MyKey has been created. See Creating a
MyKey.
• The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

76

Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger
door panels.
A. Unlock
B. Lock

A

B

Remote Control
You can use the remote control anytime the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed. The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote
control and keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors are closed.
Note: If any door is not closed, or if the hood is not closed on vehicles
equipped with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will chirp
twice and the lamps will not illuminate.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Locks

77

Smart Unlocks (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your
vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver door and lock your vehicle with the power
door lock control, all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still in
the ignition.
Your vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by:
• using the manual lock button on the door
• locking the driver door with a key
• using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped)
• using the lock button on the remote control (if equipped).
Autolock and Unlock (If Equipped)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the vehicle was autolocked, the autounlock feature will unlock all
doors when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of switching
the ignition off.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
These features can be enabled or disabled:
• by your authorized dealer
• through the information display
• using the power door lock procedure.
To enable or disable using the power door locks, do the following:
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will chirp indicating the programming
mode has been entered.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

78

Locks

Autolock: Once in programming mode, press the power door unlock
button then the lock button. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
Autounlock: Once in programming mode, press the power door lock
button then the unlock button. The horn will chirp once if autounlock
was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock
was activated.
6. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Note: The autounlock feature can be enabled or disabled independently
of the autolock feature.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s).
The system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on
• the lock button on the remote control is pressed
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control
• any door is open.
Battery Saver
The battery saver shuts off the interior lamps 30 minutes after you
switch the ignition off if you leave a door open and leave the dome lamp
switch on. It shuts off the interior lamps after 10 minutes if you leave the
dome lamp switch off.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Locks

79

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with the factory-set 5-digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of
your own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
You can save up to three personal entry codes.
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds. The doors will lock
and then unlock to confirm that the system is in programming mode.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You must enter each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1•2 on the keypad to save personal entry code 1.
The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that programming is
complete.
To program additional personal entry codes, repeat Steps 1–3, then for
Step 4:
• press 3•4 to save personal entry code 2, or
• press 5•6, 7•8, or 9•0 to save personal entry code 3.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

80

Locks

Programming Memory to a Personal Entry Code
To program a personal entry code to recall memory settings, repeat
Steps 1–4 above.
• Pressing 1•2 on the keypad in Step 4 will program the code to driver
memory setting 1.
• Pressing 3•4 in Step 4 will program the code to driver memory
setting 2.
Note: Pressing 5•6, 7•8, or 9•0 keypad numbers in Step 4 will not
program the code to recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch /
MyLincoln Touch system. Refer to the MyFord Touch / MyLincoln Touch
chapter.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Press and hold the 1•2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory-set 5-digit code
will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code
seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables the
keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote control
• the ignition is turned on.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Locks

81

Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To unlock the driver door: Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: All doors will unlock if
the two-stage unlocking feature is disabled. Refer to Locking and
Unlocking earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors: Enter the factory-set code or your personal code,
then press the 3•4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors: Press and hold 7•8 and 9•0 at the same time with
the driver door closed. You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two programmed passive anti-theft keys for
this procedure.
To display the factory set code in the information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and turn the ignition on for a few
seconds.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition and turn the ignition on.
The factory set code will display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after any other warning messages
first display.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

82

Security

SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It helps prevent the
engine from starting unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle
is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting.
A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may come with two integrated keyhead transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to
have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to
be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to
help prevent any inconveniences. See an authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Security

83

Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle. Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both
the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portion of the
remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key will start the vehicle’s engine and will operate the remote entry
system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter) if it has
been successfully programmed.
If the key was not successfully programmed, wait 20 seconds and repeat
Steps 1 through 8. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have
the new key programmed if you are still unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

84

Security

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound when:
• any door or the hood is opened without using the key or the remote
control
• the ignition is turned on with an invalid key.
Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is
any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Lock the vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate
the alarm is in the pre-armed mode and will become fully armed in
20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm, do any of the following:
• Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed
mode.
• Press the unlock button on the remote control.
• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad.
• Turn the ignition on with a valid key.
• Press the panic button on the remote control. The alarm system will
still be armed, but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding.
Note: If the driver’s door is unlocked with a key, a chime will sound
when you open the door. You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm
using any of the actions above, otherwise the alarm will trigger.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Steering Wheel

85

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.

Note: The telescope adjustment is an optional feature.
3. Lock the steering column.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

86

Steering Wheel

Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Column (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
Use the control on the side of the
steering column to adjust the
position.

To adjust:
• tilt: use the top or bottom of the control
• telescope: use the front or rear of the control.
Memory Feature
The steering column positions are saved and recalled with the memory
feature. Refer to the Seats chapter.
Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall will cancel the
operation. The column will respond to the adjustment control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column will move to the full up and in position when the ignition is
switched off. It will return to the previous setting when the ignition is
switched on. This feature can be switched on or off in the information
display.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Type 1

E

- VOL +

D

A
B

MEDIA

C

A. Volume up
B. Seek up or next
C. Media
D. Seek down or previous
E. Volume down

OK

Type 2
VOL +

E

A

VOL -

D

B
MEDIA

A. Volume up
B. Seek up or next
C. Media
D. Seek down or previous
E. Volume down

C

Media
Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio
modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset
• play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band
• seek through a track.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

87

88

Steering Wheel

VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
C. Confirm selection
See the SYNC or MyFord Touch
chapter.

- VOL +

A

MEDIA

B

OK

C

CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
See the Cruise Control chapter.
SET
CNCL
RSM

ON
OFF

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Type 1
SET
CNCL
RSM

INFO
ON
OFF

INFO RESET

SETUP
RESET

SETUP

Type 2
OK

See the Information Displays chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

89

90

Pedals

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
The control is located on the left side of the steering column. Press and
hold the appropriate control to move the pedals.
A. Farther
B. Closer

A

B

The pedal positions are saved and recalled with the memory feature
(if equipped). Refer to the Seats chapter.
The pedals should only be adjusted when the vehicle is parked.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wipers and Washers

91

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on
the windshield wipers.
Rotate the end of the control away
from you to increase the speed of
the wipers. Rotate toward you to
decrease the speed of the wipers.

Speed-dependent Wipers (If Equipped)
When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes will
decrease when intermittent wipe is selected.
RAIN-SENSING WIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected
wiping or smearing. Lower the sensitivity, switch to normal or high-speed
wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing.
Note: Turn off the wipers before entering a car wash.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity to one of the interval
moisture settings. The wipers will not
cycle until moisture is detected on
the windshield. The wiper speed will
vary based on the amount of moisture
detected on the windshield and the
sensitivity setting. The wipers will
continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected.
This feature can be turned on or off using the information display.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
interior mirror where the sensor is located, or sensor performance may
be affected.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

92

Wipers and Washers

WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.

• A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid. This feature can be turned on and off in the information
display.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Lighting

93

LIGHTING CONTROL
• Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position to
turn on the parking lamps.
• Rotate clockwise to the second
position to also turn on the
headlamps.

High Beams
Pull the lever fully past the detent
to switch the high beams on.
Pull the lever fully again switch the
high beams off.

Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly
and release it to flash the
headlamps.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

94

Lighting

AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control
of the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps
the lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition
switch is turned to off. Using the
message center, you can select a
delay from 0–180 seconds.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control to the fourth position.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control to the first position.
A

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Use the instrument lighting dimmer
control to adjust the brightness
of the instrument panel and all
applicable lit components in the
vehicle during headlamp and
parking lamp operation.
• Tap the left or right of the
control to brighten/dim all
interior lit components
incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the left or right of the control until
the desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the right of the control to the full on position to
activate the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the interior courtesy
lights.
• Press and hold the left of the control to turn off the interior courtesy
lights.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Lighting

95

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to switch your headlamps on in
low light situations or during inclement weather. The system
does not activate the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these
conditions may result in a collision.
The system turns the headlamps on with a reduced intensity output
(halogen headlamps) or turns the front turn lamps on (HID headlamps)
in daylight conditions.
To switch the system on, ignition must be in the on position, then switch
the lighting control to the off, autolamp, or parking lamp position.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the parking lamp
(second) position, headlamps on
(third) position, or autolamp
(fourth) position, and the high
beams are not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
indicator light will illuminate.
A

DIRECTION INDICATORS
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The turn signal control activation and
cancellation is electronic.
• To operate the left turn signal,
push the lever down until it stops
and release.
• To operate the right turn signal,
push the lever up until it stops
OFF
and release.
• To manually cancel turn signal
operation, push the lever again in either direction.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

96

Lighting

Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and release. The turn
signals will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and hold. The turn
signals will flash for as long as the lever is held in this position.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
button is pressed until the
courtesy lamp comes on.
• the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
Rear Dome Lamp (If Equipped)
The rear dome lamp can be turned
on or off by sliding the control.
• ON: The dome light will stay on.
• DOOR or middle position: The
dome light will only come on if a
door is opened.
• OFF: The lamp will not come on
at all.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Lighting

97

Rear Dome, Courtesy Lamps (If Equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
button is pressed until the
courtesy lamp comes on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is off.
The reading portion, the two outer lights, can only be turned on and off
at the lamp.
Rear Courtesy, Reading, Cargo Lamps (If Equipped)
The rear lamps can be turned on
when the panel dimmer control is
rotated until the lamps come on or
when any door is opened.

The lamps can be turned on or off by sliding the control.
• When the control is in the middle position, the lamp will come on
when a door is opened or the unlock button is pressed on the remote
keyless entry.
• If the control is moved to the left position, the lamp will stay on.
• If the control is moved to the right position, the lamp will not come on
at all.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

98

Windows and Mirrors

POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle
and do not let them play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when one or both of the rear
windows are open. Lower a front window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the
window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
AUTO

AUTO

One-Touch Up or Down (Front Windows)
Note: The window may be disabled for up to five minutes if it is cycled
up and down repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to the motor.
Normal operation will resume once the motor cools.
This feature automatically opens or closes the window.
Press or lift the switch completely and release. The window will fully
open or close. Press or lift it again to stop the window.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

99

Restoring the One-Touch Up Functionality
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration with the door closed.
Calibrating with the door open will cause the window to continuously
bounce back.
Functionality may be lost under low battery power conditions.
To reset this function after restoring full battery power:
1. Pull the switch to the one-touch up position.
2. Hold the switch until the glass reaches the stall position and continue
to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the window to the full down
position. One-touch up will now be functional.
Bounce-Back (One-Touch Up or Down Windows Only)
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the bounce-back feature the
window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury.
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if you release the switch
before the window is fully closed.
Window Lock
A. Unlock
B. Lock

A

B

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

100

Windows and Mirrors

Power Sliding Back Window (If Equipped)
WARNING: When operating the power sliding back window you
must ensure all rear seat occupants and/or cargo are not in the
proximity of the back window.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
The control is located on the
overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open
the window. Pull and hold the
control to close the window.
TILT

SLIDE

Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
You can use the window switches for several minutes after the you
switch the ignition off, or until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in
motion.

B
A

C

A. Left mirror
B. Off
C. Right mirror

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

101

To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Activating the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or
repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control
down during full travel, may disable the system to protect motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running,
and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for
function to return to normal.
Pull the control back to fold the
mirrors in or out.

Loose Mirror
A mirror may also be manually folded by pulling it toward the door
window glass. This may cause the mirror to appear loose and it will need
to be re-synchronized. Pull and hold the control to fold the mirrors in
until movement stops. A click will be heard indicating re-synchronization.
If the click is not heard, use the control to fold the mirrors all the way
out, then in again. Once the click is heard the mirrors will operate
normally until they are again manually folded.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
The heated exterior mirrors switch on with the heated rear window. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors in the Climate Control chapter.
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory
function. See Memory function in the Seats chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

102

Windows and Mirrors

Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s side exterior mirror will automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The rear-facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when
the turn signal is activated.
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer portion of the mirror housings illuminates when the
headlamps or parking lamps are switched on.
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature allows the mirror to
extend approximately 3 inches
(75 millimeters). It is especially
useful when towing a trailer. The
mirrors can be manually pulled out
or pushed in to the desired position.

PowerScope® Power Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature lets you position both
mirrors at the same time. The
switch is on the door trim panel.

To telescope the mirrors out, press and hold the left side of the switch.
When the mirrors are fully extended, it is normal to hear the telescoping
motors running as long as you continue to hold the switch.
To telescope the mirrors in, press and hold the right side of the switch.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

103

Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle. The blind spot
mirror is only on the driver’s side mirror.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
The image of the approaching vehicle
is small and near the inboard edge of
the main mirror when it is at a
distance. The image becomes larger
and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). The image will
C
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B).
The vehicle will transition to your
peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
B

A

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

104

Windows and Mirrors

INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Lift the cover to switch on the lamp.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

105

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it
is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moonroof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof
is closed. Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof control is located on the overhead console.
The moonroof has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its motion
during the one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce
rumbling wind noise which may happen
with the moonroof fully open. Press and
release the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to
close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle detected.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override the function. While bounce-back is active, the closing
force increases for each of the next three times the moonroof is closed.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to move the moonroof to the vent
position. Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

106

Instrument Cluster

GAUGES

A

G

B

C

F

D

E

Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Engine oil pressure gauge
B. Engine coolant temperature gauge
C. Fuel gauge
D. Transmission fluid temperature gauge
E. Speedometer
F. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
G. Tachometer
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal
operating range. If the needle falls below the normal range, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your
authorized dealer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

107

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and verify the airflow is not restricted
such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill. Also, higher
than normal operating temperature can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or off-road use). Refer to Special
operating conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for
instructions. Operating the transmission for extended periods of time
with the gauge in the higher than normal area may cause internal
transmission damage. Altering the severity of the driving conditions is
recommended to lower the transmission temperature into the normal
range. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see your
authorized dealer.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Trip Computer
See Trip A/B in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

108

Instrument Cluster

WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and
function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start
your vehicle.
Airbag – Front
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked
by your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving extended distances
with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

109

Charging System
It will illuminate when the 12–volt battery is not charging
properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Check 4X4
Displays with the message CHECK 4X4 when a four-wheel drive
fault is present. Refer to the Information Displays chapter for
more information.
Cruise Control (if equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is switched on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
Electronic Locking Differential
Displays when using the electronic locking differential.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are
driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level
being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

110

Instrument Cluster

Fasten Safety belt
It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
High Beam
It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on.
It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (if equipped)
Illuminates when hill descent is turned on.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

111

Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon” light will stay on until
the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the “service engine soon” light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing in the Fuel and
Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage
your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is active.
If the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac®/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Transmission Tow/Haul
Illuminates when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated.
Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function
and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

112

Instrument Cluster

4X2
Illuminates momentarily when two-wheel drive high is selected.
If the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on, or
remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
4X4 LOW
Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged. If the light fails
to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
4X4 HIGH
Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. If the light fails
to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
4X4 AUTO
Displays when using the 4x4 system.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

113

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and that you comply with all applicable laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls (Type 1)
• Press the INFO button to scroll
through trip, fuel usage, trailer
gain and MyKey® information.
• Press the SETUP button to scroll
through various vehicle feature
settings.
• Press the RESET button to
choose settings, reset information
and confirm messages.
SET

CNCL
RSM

INFO

ON
OFF

INFO RESET

SETUP
RESET

SETUP

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

114

Information Displays

Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following
features:
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the
items are optional.
INFO
TRIP A/B
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
MILES (km) TO E
AVG MPG (L/100km)
MPG (L/km)
TIMER
TBC GAIN (if equipped)
• TRIP A/B: Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release
INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents
the trip mode). Press the RESET button to reset. Refer to UNITS later in
this section to switch the display from metric to English.
• MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed): For more information, refer to
the MyKey® chapter.
• MILES (km) TO E: This displays an estimate of approximately how far
you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving
conditions. Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this
feature to correctly detect the added fuel. Distance to empty is calculated
using a running average fuel economy, which is based on your recent
driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not the same as the
average fuel economy display. The running average fuel economy is
re-initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected.
• AVG MPG (L/100km): Average fuel economy displays your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100 km.
• MPG (L/km): This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
• TIMER: Displays the trip elapsed drive time. Press and release RESET
to pause the timer. Press and hold RESET to reset the timer.
• TBC GAIN (if equipped): Displays the level of trailer brake gain or if
the trailer is not connected.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

115

System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through
the following features:
SETUP
RESET FOR
press the
XXX% OIL LIFE
SYSTEM CHECK RESET button
DOOR STATUS
BRAKE SYSTEM
FUEL LEVEL LOW
TBC GAIN = XX.X or NO
TRAILER
TBC GAIN = XX.X or
OUTPUT = //////
MYKEY DISTANCE
MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET=NEW
UNITS
press the
English or Metric
RESET button
AUTOLAMP
0 to 180 seconds
(SEC)
AUTOLOCK
On or Off
AUTOUNLOCK
On or Off
COURTESY
On or Off
WIPE
EASY ENTRY /
On or Off
EXIT
REAR PARK AID
On or Off
(if equipped)
TRAILER SWAY
On or Off
(if equipped)
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
RESET FOR
press the
On or Off
REMOTE START RESET button
5, 10, 15 minutes
(if equipped)
Climate On or Off
Quiet On or Off

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

116
LANGUAGE =
ENGLISH /
SPANISH /
FRENCH

Information Displays
SETUP
press the
English / Spanish / French
RESET button

• RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK: The message center will begin to cycle
through the vehicle systems and provide a status of the item if
needed. Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
• OIL LIFE XXX% displays the remaining oil life. An oil change is required
whenever indicated by the message center and according to the
recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED
ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD
RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% value (if equipped with this feature) to
another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX% is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
• UNITS: Displays the current units in English or Metric.
• AUTOLAMP (SEC): This feature keeps your headlights on for up to
three minutes after the ignition is switched off.
• AUTOLOCK: This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when
the vehicle is shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
• AUTOUNLOCK: This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
being turned off.
• COURTESY WIPE: This feature allows for an extra swipe of the wipers
after a wipe/wash cycle.
• EASY ENTRY / EXIT: This feature automatically moves the driver’s
seat rearward and adjusts the steering wheel for easy exit/entry from
the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

117

• REAR PARK AID (if equipped): This feature sounds a tone to warn
the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper, and functions only when
R (Reverse) gear is selected.
• TRAILER SWAY (if equipped): This feature uses the electronic
stability control to mitigate trailer sway.
• CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY: For more
information refer to MyKey® in the Locks and Security chapter.
• RESET FOR REMOTE START (if equipped)
• LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH: Allows you to choose
which language the message center will display in.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press the RESET button to set the language choice.
Information Display Controls (Type 2)
• Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
• Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to
exit a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting/messages.
OK

Main menu
You can access the menus using the information display control.
• Gauge Mode
• Trip A/B

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

118

Information Displays
• Fuel Economy
• Truck Apps (If Equipped)
• Settings
• Information

Gauge Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following gauge
options.

Gauges Detail

Gauge Mode
Trans Temp
Compass
The compass orientation can be
changed between fixed north or
rotating north. To change the
modes, press OK when the
compass display is shown. Use the
right arrow to choose the mode.
Press and hold OK to set the
mode.
2–speed Auto
Displays power distribution
4X4
between the front and rear wheels.
More power to either front or rear
wheels will be displayed by more
area filled in.
Blank

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

119

Trip A/ B
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip
options.
Trip A/ B
Trip time
Trip distance
Fuel used
Avg mpg(L/100km)
Odometer (displays in lower line and may display in other menus)
Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen/press again to un-pause.
Hold OK to Reset, this resets the currently displayed trip information.
• Trip time: Registers the time of individual journeys.
• Trip distance: Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Fuel used: Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Average MPG: Shows the average distance traveled per unit of fuel
used for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy
display.
Fuel Economy
Instant MPG (L/100km)
mi (km) to E
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Fuel Hist.: shows Duration: 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 30 Minutes, Last 5
fuel usage as a bar Resets. The graph is updated each minute with the
graph based on
fuel economy that was achieved during the prior 5,
time. The duration 10, 30 minutes of driving.
time can be
changed.

Fuel Econ.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

120

Information Displays

Hold OK to Reset, this resets the currently displayed fuel economy
information.
• Instant MPG: shows instantaneous fuel usage.
• mi to E: shows the approximate distance the vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
• Average MPG: shows the average fuel usage based on time. See Fuel Hist.
to change the time interval. Press and hold OK to reset this value.
Truck Apps
In this mode, off-road information depicted with graphics and
trailer towing application options are available.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Truck Apps
Off Road AdvanceTrac® mode, hill descent control, off-road mode,
off-road camera: Displays which modes are active. (SVT Raptor)
Pitch and bank angle (in degrees): Displays the pitch angle
(front to rear) and bank angle (side to side) of the road surface.
Steering angle (in degrees): Displays the steering angle of
the front wheels after the vehicle has been driven for a
period of time.
Differential lock/unlock: Displays the state (locked or
unlocked) of the electronic locking differential.
Torque flow: Displays the torque flow to the front and rear
driveline and operating mode of the transfer case: 4X2, 4X4
High, 4X4 Low, 4X4 Auto.
Press OK for 4X4 System
Info
AdvanceTrac®
2–speed Auto 4X4
ELD (Electronic Locking Differential)
Hill Descent Control
Off-Road Mode
Off-Road
Press OK to Enable / Disable
Camera (SVT
Raptor)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Trailer

121

Truck Apps
Trailer disconnected. Disregard this status if your vehicle
is not equipped with a factory installed trailer brake
controller. This message may appear when an aftermarket
TBC is used even when the trailer is connected.
Active trailer name or default trailer
Accumulated trailer distance
Trailer gain and output
Press OK for Options
options
Change
When this is highlighted,
Active Trailer press the right arrow key to
change the currently
selected trailer. Use the up
and down arrows to select a
trailer and press the OK
button to choose the
highlighted trailer.
Adding a new trailer– Use
the up/down arrows to
highlight New Trailer and
press the right arrow key to
enter the New Trailer input
screen. Use the up/down
arrow keys to choose alpha,
numeric and symbol
characters and then press
the right arrow to move the
character space over.
Continue adding characters
as needed. Press the left
arrow to go back and
change a previously selected
character. When finished
with the new trailer name,
press OK to accept the new
trailer name.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

122
Trailer

Information Displays
Truck Apps
Press OK for Options
options
Connection
Conventional, Fifth Wheel
Checklist
and Gooseneck. Use the
(if equipped) up/down arrows to highlight
one of these choices and
press OK to display the
connection checklist. Follow
the on-screen instructions to
go through the connections
list.
Delete
Use the up/down arrows to
Trailer
highlight the trailer you
want to delete and press
OK to delete. Follow the
on-screen prompts to exit
or confirm delete.
Information Tow Haul mode, Trailer
Screen
Brake Controller.
Use the up/down buttons to
Rename
highlight a trailer and press
Trailer
OK to select it. Use the
up/down arrow buttons to
change the characters as
needed. When done, press
OK to accept the change.
Reset Trailer Use the up/down buttons
Mileage /
to select a trailer, then
Kilometers
press and hold OK to reset
(if equipped) the trailer mileage
(kilometers).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

123

Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Driver Assist

Settings
Rear Park Aid
On/Off
Rear Video
Camera Delay
Camera
Visual Park Aid
Guidelines
Zoom Levels
(This will only
be shown when
Reverse (R) is
selected.
Trailer Brake
Electric or Elect.
Mode
Trailer Sway
On/Off
Control

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

On/Off
On/Off
Fixed/Off
Off, Level 1–3

Over Hydraulic

124
Vehicle

Information Displays
Autolamp
Delay
Compass

DTE
Calculation
(distance to
empty)
Easy Entry
Exit
Locks

Menu
Control

Settings
Off or XXX seconds
Zone Setting (1–15) See the diagram below to
determine your magnetic zone. Calibration (When
choosing Calibration, follow the on-screen
directions to calibrate the compass)
Normal history used
Towing history used
On/Off
Autolock
On/Off
Autounlock
On/Off
Unlocking
One Stage or Two Stage
Standard: with standard set, pressing the up/down
arrows from a lower level menu will escape to the
main menu.
Memory On: with memory on set, pressing the
up/down arrows will navigate to the previous lower
level menu.
Set to XXX% (Hold OK to Reset).

Oil Life
Reset
Pwr Running Auto/Off/Out
Boards
Remote Start Climate Control

Wipers

Duration
Quiet Start
Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
Wipers

Front Defrost
Auto/Off
Rear Defrost
Driver Seat
Passenger Seat
Heater-A/C
Auto/ Last
Setting
5, 10 or 15 minutes, Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

125

Compass:

3 2

15

1

4

14
13

5

12
6

MyKey

Language
Units

Determine which magnetic zone you
are in for your geographic location
by referring to the zone map.

7 8 9 1011

Settings
Create MyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKey
AdvanceTrac
Always On / Selectable
MAX Speed
80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Speed Warning
45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or
105 km/h), Off
Volume Limiter
On/Off
Clear MyKey
Hold OK to Clear MyKey
English, Español, Français (Hold OK to Set)
Distance
Miles and Gallons
L/100 km
km/L
Temperature
Celsius (°C)
Farenheit (°F)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

126

Information Displays

Information
In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information
and perform a system check.

MyKey

System Check

Information
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a
programmed MyKey)
Some items will only display during a system check if a
problem has been detected. If an issue exists on one of
the monitored systems, the number of warnings that
need immediate attention will display in red and the
number of informational warnings will display in amber.
Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the
list; press the right arrow button to display specific
information on the highlighted warning

Transmission indicator display
The transmission gear indicator displays in the right side of the message
center when using the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission feature.
This display will not be shown in all screen modes. For example: when
programming certain vehicle features or in certain information menus.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the RESET button for Type 1 displays or the OK button for
Type 2 displays to acknowledge and remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after
a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can
access the menus.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays
AdvanceTrac® /
Traction Control
Messages
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC

ADVANCETRAC
OFF
ADVANCETRAC ON
ADVANCETRAC
SPORT MODE
TRACTION
CONTROL OFF
TRACTION
CONTROL ON
Airbag Messages
REMOVE OBJECTS
NEAR PASSENGER
SEAT
Alarm/Security
Messages
TO STOP ALARM
START VEHICLE

SECURITY SYSTEM
FAULT

127

Action / Description

Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
been disabled by the driver.
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
been enabled by the driver.
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® sport mode
has been enabled by the driver. (SVT Raptor)
Displayed when the traction control has been
disabled by the driver. Refer to the Traction
Control chapter for more information.
Displayed when the traction control has been
enabled by the driver. Refer to the Traction
Control chapter for more information.
Action / Description
Displays when the system detects a
malfunction due to a blocked sensor.
Action / Description
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is
armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent
the perimeter alarm system from triggering,
the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires.
Displayed when the security system has
detected a fault. See your authorized dealer
for service.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

128

Information Displays

Battery and
Charging System
Messages
TURN POWER OFF
TO SAVE BATTERY

LOW BATTERY
FEATURES
TEMPORARILY
TURNED OFF

Brake System
Messages
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW
CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM

PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED

Action / Description

Displayed when the battery management system
determines that the battery is at a low state of
charge or, the ignition has been in accessory
position or on position with the engine off for
approximately 45 minutes. Turn the ignition off
as soon as possible to protect the battery. This
message will clear once the vehicle has been
started and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads while driving will allow faster battery
state-of-charge recovery. See Battery
management system in the Maintenance
chapter for more information.
Displayed when the battery management
system detects an extended low-voltage
condition. Various vehicle features will be
disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off
as many of the electrical loads as soon as
possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
Action / Description
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake
system should be inspected immediately. Refer to
Brake fluid in the Maintenance chapter.
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Displayed when the parking brake is set and the
vehicle is in motion.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

129

Door Messages
X DOOR AJAR

Action / Description
Displayed when the corresponding door is not
completely closed.

Drivetrain Messages
NEUTRAL TOW
ENABLED LEAVE
TRANSMISSION IN
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL TOW
DISABLED

Action / Description
Displayed when the transfer case is in the
neutral position. This message indicates that
the vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground.
Displayed when the transfer case is NOT in
the neutral position. This message indicates
that the vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with
all four wheels on the ground.
Displayed when an electronic locking
differential (ELD) system fault is present. For
more information, refer to Electronic locking
differential (ELD) in the Four-Wheel Drive
chapter.
Displayed when the electronic locking
differential (ELD) is enabled or disabled.

CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL

LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
ENGAGED/
DISENGAGED
TO ENGAGE
LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
SLOW TO XX
MPH/KM/H
TO ENGAGE
LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
RELEASE
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL
SHIFT TO PARK

Displayed when the electronic locking
differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.

Displayed when the electronic locking
differential request the accelerator to be
released in order to engage.

Displays as a reminder to shift into park.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

130

Information Displays

Engine Messages
Action / Description
POWER REDUCED
Displayed when the engine temperature gauge
TO LOWER ENGINE needle moves to H. You may notice reduced
engine power. Refer to Engine coolant in the
TEMP
Maintenance chapter for more information.
Fuel Messages
CHECK FUEL FILL
INLET
FUEL LEVEL LOW

Action / Description
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be
properly closed.
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.

Key Messages
COULD NOT
PROGRAM
INTEGRATED KEY
TO DRIVE: TURN
KEY TO ON

Action / Description
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a fifth integrated key. For more
information, refer to the Security chapter.
Displayed when the factory equipped remote
start is activated.

Maintenance
Messages
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED
SERVICE POWER
STEERING
SERVICE POWER
STEERING NOW

POWER STEERING
ASSIST FAULT

Action / Description
Displayed when the engine oil life is nearing
its end.
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. See your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system
that requires service immediately. See your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays

131

MyKey® Messages
MYKEY ACTIVE
DRIVE SAFELY
ADVANCETRAC
ALWAYS ON MYKEY SETTING
VEHICLE NEAR
TOP SPEED

Action / Description
Displayed when MyKey® is active.

Park Aid Messages
CHECK REAR PARK
AID
REAR PARK AID
OFF
REAR PARK AID ON

Action / Description
Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Displayed when the rear park aid is disabled
by the driver.
Displayed when the rear park aid is enabled.

Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
ESC cannot be deactivated.

Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE AT TOP
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
SPEED - MYKEY
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
SETTING
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey® is in use and the MyKey speed limit
80 MPH
is on.
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey® is in use and the MyKey speed limit
130 KM/H
is on
CHECK SPEED
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds
DRIVE SAFELY
a preselected speed.
BUCKLE UP TO
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and
Belt-Minder® is activated.
UNMUTE AUDIO
MYKEY COULD NOT Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two existing
PROGRAM
MyKeys.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

132

Information Displays

Off Road Messages
FOR OFF ROAD
SLOW TO 5 MPH
OFF ROAD MODE
ENABLED
EXITING OFF
ROAD MODE
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL ACTIVE
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL OFF
FOR HILL
DESCENT REDUCE
SPEED
FOR HILL
DESCENT SELECT
GEAR
HILL DESCENT DRIVER RESUME
CONTROL
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL FAULT
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL OFF
SYSTEM COOLING
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL READY
CAMERA
MALFUNCTION

Action / Description
Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement
for off-road mode entry has not been met.
Displayed when off-road mode becomes active.
Displayed when off-road mode becomes
inactive..
Displayed when hill descent control mode
becomes active.
Displayed when hill descent control mode
becomes inactive.
Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement
for off-road mode entry has not been met.
Displayed when the driver is able to select a
transmission gear for hill descent mode.
Displayed when hill descent control mode is
deactivated and the driver must resume
control.
Displayed when a hill descent system fault is
present.
Displayed when the hill descent system is
cooling due to overuse.
Displayed when the hill descent control switch
is turned on.
Displayed when the front camera is not
operating properly.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Tire Messages
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT

TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT

Trailer Messages
TRAILER BRAKE
GAIN: XX.X
[OUTPUT]
TRAILER BRAKE
GAIN: XX.X NO
TRAILER
TRAILER BRAKE
MODULE FAULT

TRAILER
CONNECTED
TRAILER
DISCONNECTED

133

Action / Description
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions refer to the
Wheels and Tires chapter . If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Action / Description
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer
brake.
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer
brake when a trailer is not connected.
Displayed and accompanied by a single chime, in
response to faults sensed by the TBC. Refer to
Trailer towing in the Towing chapter for more
information.
Displayed when a correct trailer connection
(a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Displayed when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
Disregard this status if your vehicle is not equipped
with a factory installed trailer brake controller. This
message may appear when an aftermarket TBC is
used even when the trailer is connected.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

134

Information Displays

Trailer Messages
TRAILER SWAY
REDUCE SPEED
WIRING FAULT ON
TRAILER

Transmission
Messages
SHIFT TO PARK
4WD Messages
CHECK 4X4

4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS
FOR 4X4 LOW APPLY
BRAKE
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT
TO N
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW
TO 3 MPH
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW
APPLY BRAKE
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW
SHIFT TO N
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW
SLOW TO 3 MPH
SHIFT DELAYED
PULL FORWARD

Action / Description
Displayed when the trailer sway control has
detected trailer sway.
Displayed if there are certain faults in the vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. Refer to
Trailer towing in the Towing chapter for more
information.
Action / Description
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Action / Description
Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is present.
For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive
chapter.
Displayed when the 4X4 system is making a shift.
Displayed when trying to select 4X4 LOW.
Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the
vehicle is stopped.
Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the
vehicle is moving.
Displayed when 2WD is selected from 4X4 LOW
mode.
Displayed when 2WD is selected while the
vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW.
Displayed when 2WD is selected while the
vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW.
May display when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

135

GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Distance and
strength
Terrain

Station overload

Radio reception factors
The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with the reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the audio
system muting.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into
the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage
CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge.
Do not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

136

Audio System

MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the
current folder.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

137

AM/FM

A

B

CLK

G

AUDIO

F

C

D

E
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. CLK: Press this button to switch the display between the clock and
radio frequency. To set the time:
1. Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash.
2. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the hours. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to
set the minutes.
3. Press CLK again to exit clock mode.
B. Tune: Press these arrow buttons to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search. In AUDIO mode, press
the buttons to adjust different sound settings.
C. AUDIO: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Fade and Balance.
D. SEEK: Press this button to go to the previous or next strong station
on the frequency band.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

138

Audio System

E. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
F. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.
G. VOL-PUSH:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn the control to adjust the volume.
AM/FM/CD/MP3 SATELLITE-COMPATIBLE SOUND SYSTEM

A
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

B
U
T
S
R
Q
P

LOAD

D
DIRECT

TEXT
CAT/FOLD

SCAN

SEEK

CLOCK#

G

SOUND

I
VOL

O

MENU

AM/FM

CD

SIRIUS

AUX

TUNE
OK

N

C
F

E

H
J

K

L
M

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with an authorized dealer.
A. Memory presets:
• Store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any
station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

139

• Save presets automatically by using the autoset feature. Press MENU
repeatedly until AUTO PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
the SEEK buttons to turn AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five
seconds for the search to initiate or press OK to immediately start the
search. If you press another control within those five seconds, the search
does not start. The system fills the presets with the 10 strongest stations;
the station stored in preset 1 begins playing. If there are fewer than 10
strong stations, the system stores the last one in the remaining presets.
Note: Autoset does not delete your original preset stations.
Note: In order to re-run the autoset features, you must first turn it off
before turning it back on.
B. CD slot: Insert a CD.
C. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
D. Down arrow button: Press this button to make selections in MENU
mode.
E. Up arrow button: Press this button to make selections in MENU mode.
F. MENU: Press this button to access different audio features:
• Compression brings the soft and loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
• Shuffle plays the current CD tracks in random order.
• RDS Radio allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a certain
category of music format such as CLASSIC, COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB or
ROCK.
• SIRIUS allows you to access different satellite radio options.
G. CLOCK: Press this button to set the time. Use the memory presets
buttons to enter the time, and then press OK.
H. PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC
system. See the SYNC chapter for more information. If your vehicle is
not equipped with SYNC, the display reads NO PHONE.
I. SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Balance and Fade. Use the SEEK or TUNE controls to change the settings.
• Bass levels can be increased or decreased.
• Treble levels can be increased or decreased.
• Balance adjusts the sound between left and right speakers.
• Fade adjusts the sound between the front and back speakers.
• Speed Compensated Volume adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between off and +7.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

140

Audio System

• All Seat Mode/Driver Seat Mode optimizes sound quality for the
chosen seating position.
• DSP Mode (if equipped) allows you to choose between STEREO
SURROUND mode and STEREO mode.
J. SEEK:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
• In SIRIUS mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or
next channel. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or
News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the
selected category.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press one of these buttons to select the
previous or next track.
K. CD: Press this button to access CD and MP3 modes.
• The disc begins to play where it left off. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC
appears in the display.
• Press the SEEK buttons to access the previous or next track. Press
and hold the SEEK buttons to quickly reverse or fast forward within
the same track.
L. TUNE/OK/Play/Pause:
• In radio mode, turn the control to manually search through the radio
frequency band.
• In SIRIUS mode, turn the control to find the next or previous
available satellite radio station.
• OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media features.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, see the SYNC chapter for
more information.
• Play/Pause allows you to play or pause a track when listening to a CD.
M. AUX: Press this button to access media through your auxiliary input
jack. If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, see the SYNC chapter for
more information.
N. SIRIUS: Press this button to access different satellite radio modes.
Note: SIRIUS satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with an authorized dealer for availability.
O. On/Off/VOL:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
P. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

141

Q. CAT/FOLD:
• In SIRIUS mode, press this button to switch between turning the
most recently selected satellite radio category off or on.
• In MP3 mode, press this button, then use the SEEK buttons to
access the previous or next folder.
R. SCAN:
• In radio mode, press this button to hear a brief sampling of all radio
stations.
• In SIRIUS mode, press this button to hear a brief sampling of all
available channels. If you select a specific category, press SCAN for a
brief sampling of all available channels within the selected category.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press this button to hear a brief sampling of
all tracks on the current disc or MP3 folder.
S. DIRECT:
• In radio mode, press this button to select the desired radio frequency
(such as 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
• In SIRIUS mode, press this button to enter the desired channel (such
as 002) using the memory preset buttons. If you only enter one digit,
and press OK, the system goes to that channel. If you enter three
digits, the system automatically goes to that channel, if available. You
may cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If you enter an invalid
station number, INVALID CHANNEL appears in the display and the
system continues playing the current station.
• In CD mode, press this button to enter the desired track number
using the memory preset buttons. The system then begins playing
that track.
• In MP3 mode, press this button to enter a memory preset button of
the desired folder. The system advances to that specific folder.
T. TEXT:
• MP3 mode, press this button to view Album (AL), Folder (FL), Song
(SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
• In text mode, sometimes the display requires additional text to show.
When the < / > indicator is on, press this button, then use the SEEK
buttons to view the additional text.
U. LOAD: This control is not operational. To load a CD, insert the disc,
label side up, into the CD slot.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

142

Audio System

MyFord® SYSTEM

RADIO

SIRIUS

AUX

PHONE

MENU

SOUND

2 ABC

1

CD

CLOCK

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS

8 TUV

9 WXYZ

0

*

VOL

#

TUNE

OK

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with an authorized dealer.
A. RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio
frequency bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to
select different radio functions.
B. CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

143

C. Memory presets:
• In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
• In CD mode, press one of these buttons to select a track.
D. Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system
depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
E. TUNE:
• In radio mode, turn the control to manually search the frequency
band.
• In satellite radio mode, turn the control to tune to the next or
previous channel.
F. Reverse and Fast Forward; AM/FM/CD Seek:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction
to the next strong radio station or memory preset.
• In SIRIUS mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or
next channel. If you select a specific category (such as Jazz, Rock or
News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the
selected category. Press and hold one of these buttons to move
quickly in that direction to the next channel or category.
• In CD mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or next
track. Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that
direction within the current track.
G. OK and arrow buttons:
• Press the up and down or left and right arrow buttons to browse
menu selections.
• Press OK to confirm menu selections.
H. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
I. Power and Volume:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
J. CLOCK: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center
arrow controls to change the hours and minutes.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

144

Audio System

K. SOUND: Press this button to adjust settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Balance and Fade.
L. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
See Menu structure later in this section.
M. PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC
system. See the SYNC chapter for more information.
N. AUX: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch
between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port. See Auxiliary
input jack later in this chapter.
O. SIRIUS: Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly
different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a
menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
Scan
Set Category

RBDS/RDS Text

Radio Settings
Select for a brief sampling of all available
channels.
Select to have the system search by certain
music categories (such as Rock, Pop or
Country).
Select to view additional broadcast data, if
available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS
must be on for you to set a category.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

145

SIRIUS
Select for a brief sampling of all available
channels.
Show ESN
Select to view your satellite radio electronic
serial number (ESN). You need this number
when communicating with SIRIUS® to
activate, modify or track your account.
Channel Guide
Select to view available satellite radio
channels. Press OK to open a list of the
following options for this channel: Tune
Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once
you skip or lock a channel, you can only access
it by pressing Direct and entering the channel
number. Locking or unlocking a channel
requires your PIN.
Set Category
Select to view channel categories (such as
Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category,
seek and scan functions only stop on channels
in that category.
Alerts
Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs,
artists or teams. The system alerts you when
the selection is playing on another channel.
Save up to 20 alerts.
Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked
stations.
Skip No Stations
Remove the skip feature from all the channels
you previously skipped.
Parental Lock (PIN) Select to create a PIN, which allows you to
lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is
1234.
Scan

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

146
Spd. Comp. Vol.

Sound
Occupancy Mode

Scan All
Scan Folder
CD Compression

Set Time
Set Date
24h Mode

Dimming
Language
Temp. Setting

Audio System
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to
compensate for speed and wind noise.
You can set the system between 0 and +7.
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Middle,
Bass, Fade and Balance.
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen
seating position.
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.
Select to scan all music in the current MP3
folder.
Select to bring soft and loud passages together
for a more consistent listening level.
Clock Settings
Select to set the time.
Select to set the calendar date.
Select to view clock time in a 12–hour mode or
24–hour mode.
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.
Select to display the language in English,
French or Spanish.
Select to display the outside temperature in
Fahrenheit or Celsius.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

147

AM/FM/CD SONY AUDIO SYSTEM

A

B

VOL

1

C

2

TUNE

3

MEDIA

4

G

5

F

6

E

D

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features.
See the MyFord Touch chapter for more information.
A. VOL and Power:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
B. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
C. CD Slot: Insert a CD.
D. TUNE: Turn this control to manually search through the radio
frequency band.
E. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

148

Audio System

F. Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
• In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next
channel. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or
News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the
selected category.
• In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
G. MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as
AM, FM and A/V Input.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely
stored while your vehicle is moving.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

149

The auxiliary input jack allows you
to connect and play music from
your portable music player through
your vehicle speakers. You can use
any portable music player designed
for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1⁄8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
Adjust the volume as desired.
Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear music from your device even if it is low.
Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.

USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory sticks
and charge devices (if supported).
See the SYNC chapter for more
information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

150

Audio System

MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located either in the center console or behind an
access door in the instrument panel (below the climate control buttons)
and has the following features:
A. A/V inputs
B. SD card slot
C. USB ports
C

A

B

For more information, see the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch
chapter.
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
For optimal reception performance, keep the
obstructions
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Audio System

151

Potential satellite radio reception issues
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time. To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

152

Audio System

Troubleshooting
Radio display
Acquiring

Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure

Condition
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
There is an internal
module or system failure
present.

Possible action
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.

If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a
fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel
The channel is no longer Tune to another channel
available.
or choose another
preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does
Contact SIRIUS at
not include this channel. 1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal
The signal is lost from
The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or
When you move into an
SIRIUS tower to your
open area, the signal
vehicle antenna.
should return.
Updating
Update of channel
No action required.
programming in
The process may take
progress.
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
Your satellite service is
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474
no longer available.
1–888–539–7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
None Found. Check
All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
Channel Guide.
selected category are
turn off the Lock or Skip
either skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the No action required.
channels available for
your vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Climate Control

153

MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
B. Rear defrost and heated mirrors: Turns the heated windows and
mirrors off and on. See Heated windows and mirrors later in this
chapter for more information.
C. Air distribution control: Press to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and demister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

154

Climate Control

D. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
E. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle. Even when this button is not selected,
air may still recirculate in some instances in order to reduce vehicle
warm-up time in cold conditions or cool-down time in hot conditions.
Note: For better cooling in hot conditions, recirculated air automatically
engages when the air distribution control is in Panel or Panel/Floor
modes and the air conditioning is on. You can switch to fresh air by
pressing the recirculated air button again.
Note: You may notice changes in sound between recirculated mode and
other airflow modes.
F. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
G. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Turn to select the desired temperature.
H. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Turn to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch
the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
I. Power: Press to turn the system off and on. When the system is off,
outside air cannot enter the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Climate Control

155

MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A

B

C D E

F

A/C

G

H

MAX
A/C

R

I
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Turn to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch
the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated windows and mirrors off and on.
See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
C. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
D. Air distribution control: Press to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

156

Climate Control
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and demister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.

E. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
F. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
G. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle. Even when this button is not selected,
air may still recirculate in some instances in order to reduce vehicle
warm-up time in cold conditions or cool-down time in hot conditions.
Note: For better cooling in hot conditions, recirculated air automatically
engages when the air distribution control is in panel or panel/floor modes
and the air conditioning is on. You can switch to fresh air by pressing the
recirculated air button again.
Note: You may notice changes in sound between recirculated mode and
other airflow modes.
H. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Turn to select the desired temperature.
I. Power: Press to turn the system off and on. When the system is off,
outside air cannot enter the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Climate Control

157

DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C D E

A/C

G

F

H

MAX
A/C
PASS
TEMP

R

AUTO

K

J

I

Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
See Menu features in the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch chapter.
A. Power/Driver temperature control: Press to turn the climate
control system off and on. When the system is off, outside air cannot
enter the vehicle.
Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of
the vehicle.
This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone
operation is disengaged.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated windows and mirrors off and on. See
Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this button
turns them on also.
C. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

158

Climate Control

D. Air distribution control: Press to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and demister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.
E. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: A/C turns on automatically in MAX A/C, Defrost and Floor/Defrost.
F. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
G. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle. Even when this button is not selected,
air may still recirculate in some instances in order to reduce vehicle
warm-up time in cold conditions or to cool down time in hot conditions.
Note: Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected
or can be turned on manually in any airflow mode except Defrost.
Note: You may notice changes in sound between recirculated mode and
other airflow modes.
Note: For better cooling in hot conditions, recirculated air automatically
engages when the air distribution control is in panel or panel/floor modes
and the air conditioning is on. You can switch to fresh air by pressing the
recirculated air button again.
H. PASS TEMP: Press and turn to increase or decrease the air
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Climate Control

159

I. Fan speed control +: Press to increase the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle.
J. AUTO: Press to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or
recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected
temperature.
K. Fan speed control - : Press to decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into position P to continue to receive
cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in A/C mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in panel or panel/floor modes:
1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Select A/C and recirculated air to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

160
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Climate Control

aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
Select Floor/Panel.
Select A/C.
Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into position P to continue to receive
cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in AUTO mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in manual override control:
1. Choose Panel, A/C, and recirc controls.
2. Set the temperature to LO.
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Climate Control

161

HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The ignition must be switched on to use this feature.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear window, the
defroster does not operate when the window is opened.
Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press
the button again within 10 minutes to switch it off. It switches off
automatically after 10 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines.
Your warranty does not cover this damage.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: If your driver side mirror is equipped with the auto-dimming
feature, the glass is thicker than the passenger side mirror and may take
longer to defrost.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist and fog when the rear
window defroster is activated.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote
start.
You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation. Turn the
ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can now
make adjustments. You will need to turn certain vehicle-dependent
features back on, such as:
• heated seats
• cooled seats
• heated mirrors
• heated rear window.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

162

Climate Control

Automatic Climate Systems
Automatic Settings
You can set the climate control to operate in AUTO mode through the
information display setting: Remote Start > Climate Control > Heater –
A/C > Auto. The climate control system automatically sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). Cooled seats are set to
high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on
previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated/cooled
seats are not automatically turned on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats
are set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information
display). The rear defroster and heated mirrors are automatically turned
on. If it is desired to have the system operate in defrost mode, select
AUTO for Heater – A/C. Also select AUTO for front defrost in the
information display.
Last Settings
You can set the climate control to operate using the last climate control
settings through the information display setting: Remote Start > Climate
Control > Heater – A/C > Last Settings. The climate control system
automatically uses the settings last selected before the vehicle was
turned off.
Heated and Cooled Devices
The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices
inside the vehicle. These devices (if available, and selected to AUTO in
the information displays) may also be switched on during remote start.
Heated devices are typically switched on during cold weather, and cooled
devices during hot weather.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

163

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seat
back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to
reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a crash.

We recommend that you follow these guidelines:
• Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees from vertical.
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

164

Seats

• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel.
We recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 millimeters) between
your breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision, you and the passenger occupants should not sit in and/or
operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper position.
Never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright driving position before
adjusting any head restraint. Properly adjust the head restraint so that
the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and
positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants
of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats
Front Seat Head Restraints

Rear Seat Outboard Head
Restraints

Rear Seat Center Head
Restraint

B

A

D

C

The head restraints consist of :
A. An energy absorbing head restraint
B. Two steel stems
C. Guide sleeve adjust and release button
D. Guide sleeve unlock and remove button
E. Fold button (rear outboard only)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

165

166

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raise: Pull up the head restraint.
Lower:
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push down on the head restraint.
Remove:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: For second row outboard seats, you can fold the head restraint
forward for easier removal.
Reinstall:
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint
down until it locks.
Fold:
Note: The rear seat outboard head restraints may fold forward for
improved visibility.
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Front Seat Center Head
Restraint

Your vehicle may be equipped with a front row center head restraint that
is non-adjustable.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

167

These head restraints consist of :
A. An energy absorbing head restraint
B. Two steel stems
C. Guide sleeve unlock and remove button
Remove:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head
restraint down until it locks.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort.
To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or
riding position.
2. Tilt the head restraint forward by gently pulling
the top of the head restraint.

Once it is in its forward-most position, tilt it forward once more to
release it to the upright position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is
tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases
to the upright position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

168

Seats

MANUAL SEATS
Moving the Seats Backward and Forward

Recline Adjustment

Manual Lumbar
Turn the control to adjust your
support.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

169

POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seat back when the
vehicle is moving.
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Move the
switch in the direction of the arrow
to raise or lower the seat cushion or
to move the seat forward, backward,
up or down.
Power Recline (if equipped)
Move the switch to recline the seat
back forward or rearward.

Power Lumbar (if equipped)
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Press the
forward or rearward side of the
control for more or less support.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

170

Seats

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before activating the seat memory, make sure that
the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory store function when your
vehicle is moving.
This feature will save and recall the position of the driver seat, power
mirrors, power adjustable foot pedals (if equipped), and steering column
(if equipped).
The driver memory seat control is located on the left side of
the driver’s seat.

1

2

Programming Memory Positions
1. To program position 1, move the memory features to the desired
positions using the associated controls.
2. Press and hold memory button 1 for about two seconds. A chime will
sound confirming that a memory position has been set.
To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using memory
button 2.
A memory position may be programmed at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, see the
Keys and Remote Control chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

171

Recalling Saved Memory Positions
To recall position 1 settings, press and release memory button 1.
The memory features will move to the saved memory 1 position.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry
transmitter unlock button (if the transmitter is programmed to a memory
position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed
to a memory position. If the easy entry/exit feature is enabled, the mirrors,
pedals and steering column will move to the programmed memory position
and the seat will move to the easy entry position. The seat will move to the
driving memory position when the ignition is activated.
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in position P or N if the ignition is on.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled, this feature automatically
moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 inches (5 centimeters) when the
transmission selector lever is in position P and the key is removed from
the ignition.
If the seat is located less than 2 inches (5 centimeters) from the rear of
the seat track, the seat travel will be less than 2 inches (5 centimeters)
rearward.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous position when the key is put
in the ignition.
This feature is enabled or disabled through the information display.
See the Information Displays chapter for more information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

172

Seats

REAR SEATS
Folding Up the Rear Seats (SuperCab only)
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into a vertical storage position.
1. Pull the control to release the
seat cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until
it locks into the vertical storage
position.

Returning the Seat to the Seating Position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a
crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat to release the seat cushion
from the storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it locks into the horizontal position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

173

Folding Up the Rear Seats (SuperCrew Vehicles Only)
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into a vertical storage position.
Rotate the seat cushion up by lifting
on the corner until it locks into the
vertical storage position.

Note: The handle on the bottom of the seat cushion does not need to be
pulled to lift the seat cushion to the storage position.
Returning the Seat to the Seating Position
WARNING: Before returning the seat cushion to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion.
1. Pull the handle on the bottom of
the seat cushion to release the seat
cushion from the storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until
it rests into the horizontal position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

174

Seats

Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door armrest.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

175

• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.

The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activate the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated, they will turn off automatically
when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
REAR SEAT ARMREST (IF EQUIPPED)
Pull the strap located on the center
seat back to access the armrest and
cupholders.

The cupholders are located inside the rear seat armrest. To open the
cupholders:
1. Push in gently on the center of the plastic panel on the front edge of
the armrest. The cupholders will partially open.
2. Pull the cupholder fully open before using.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

176

Seats

HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so could
drain your vehicle’s battery.
Press to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

177

HEATED AND COOLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat.
• Do not operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled
on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat button/symbol to cycle through the
various heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated
by more indicator lights.

Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat button/symbol to cycle through the
various cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.

A/C

If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

178

Seats

Heated and Cooled Seats Air Filter Replacement (If Equipped)
The heated and cooled seat system includes air filters. They must be
replaced periodically. See scheduled maintenance information.
The filter is located under each front seat. Access the filter from the
second row foot-well area. Move the front seats all the way to the full
front and full up positions to ease access.
To remove a filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter until the tabs are
released, then remove the filter.

To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
clockwise into the housing until it
clips into position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Seats

179

FRONT SEAT ARMREST (IF EQUIPPED)
Push the release control to move
the armrest up or down.
Pull out the drawer at the bottom of
the center seat to access the cup
holders (if equipped)

To gain access to the storage
compartment (if equipped) under
the center seat cushion, lift the
latch to open the lid.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

180 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure you
identify which transmitter you have by comparing it to the graphics
below.
HomeLink®

Car2U® Home Automation
System

Note: The programming of the two types of universal garage door
openers are different and have different instructions. Identify your
package and refer to the instructions listed in this chapter.
CAR2U® HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Before you begin the programming process, park your vehicle in
front of the garage door opener motor or other device you want to
program.
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 181
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: Programming the system to a community gate will require a
unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model. Contact
the help line at 1-866-572-2728 for further information.
Note: If you accidently enter the program mode by pressing and
releasing the outer two buttons or all three buttons simultaneously, do
not press any button until the module times out after a few seconds and
resets to normal mode. When the module has timed out, all three LED
lamps will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun
visor.
The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed to
operate security devices and home lighting systems.
Additional system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free help line 1-866-572-2728.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

182 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Rolling Code Programming
Note: If you do not follow the time-sensitive instructions, the device will
time out and you will have to repeat the complete procedure.
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the outer two
buttons for 1–2 seconds, then
release.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
Note: If you cannot locate the learn
button, see the Owner’s Manual for
your garage door opener or call the
toll-free help line at 1-866-572-2728.
3. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 10–30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
4. Return to your car.
5. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door. You may
need to hold the button from
5–20 seconds, during which time
the selected button LED lamp will flash slowly.
6. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
The LED lamp will flash rapidly until programming is complete.
7. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device, repeat Steps 1 through 6,
substituting a different function button in Step 5.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 183
Fixed Code Programming
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
To program units with fixed code
DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter,
paper and a pen or pencil.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Open the battery cover and note
all the switch settings from left to
right.
When the switch is in the up, on, or + position, mark down “left button”.
When the switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, mark down
“middle button”.
When the switch is in the down, off, or – position, mark down “right
button”.
3. Press all three function buttons
simultaneously for a few seconds
and then release. The LED lamps
will flash slowly.
Note: The following step must be
completed within 2.5 minutes.
4. Enter the corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into the
system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings
you noted.
5. Simultaneously press and release all three function buttons. The LED
lamps will illuminate.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

184 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
6. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door.
Note: You may need to hold the
button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage
door.
7. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
When the button is released, the LED lamp will flash slowly.
8. The LED lamp will begin to flash rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door does not operate, repeat the previous
steps. Otherwise, call the toll-free help line at 1-866-572-2728.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
LED lamps above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the LED lamps flash, release the buttons. The codes for all
buttons are erased.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 185
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held garage
door opener with a three-button
transmitter that is integrated into
the driver’s sun visor.

The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed to
operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

186 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the
ignition, turn the key so that the ignition is in the on position.
2. Hold your hand-held, garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters)
away from the HomeLink button you want
to program.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release either one
until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When
the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for five
seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the
door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed HomeLink button, and then begin programming
your garage door opener. See below for Steps 5 – 7.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. Do the
following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the
hand-held transmitter button every two seconds. The HomeLink
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink
function button recognizes and accepts the hand-held transmitter’s radio
frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button, follow Steps 5 – 7 as listed
below to program your garage door opener.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 187
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit
and you may need to remove the cover or
lamp lens on your garage door opener.
5. Press the learn button on the garage door
opener motor, and then you have 30 seconds
to complete the next step.
6. Return to your car.
7. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for two seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights above
the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
Programming HomeLink to a Genie Intellicode 2 garage door
opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed
to operate with the garage door opener.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

188 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Programing the transmitters
To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode. To do this:
A. Red LED
B. Green LED

A

B

1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for
10 seconds. The LED light will change from green to green and red.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming
mode. If done properly the LED light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the
button on the sun visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program.
The indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds.
If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter
will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter LED displays
green and red, release the button until the LED turns off before
pressing the button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change
from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly
the LED will turn green.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 189
Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode garage door
opener motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
To program HomeLink to the garage
door opener motor:
1. Press and hold the PROGRAM
button on the garage door opener
motor until both blue LED’s turn on.
2. Release the PROGRAM button.
Only the smaller round LED should
be on.
3. Press and release the program
button. The larger purple LED will
flash
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s
previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for
two seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink device
To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons, press and hold
the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash.
The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both
buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the
LED should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any
one of the three HomeLink buttons is pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

190

Auxiliary Power Points

AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
•
•
•
•

on the instrument panel
on the rear of the first-row center seat (if equipped)
inside the center console storage compartment (if equipped)
on the rear of the center console (if equipped).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Auxiliary Power Points

191

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat
the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to
overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the
150–watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet
is not in use.
Note: The power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the ignition is on
without the engine running. Keep the engine running to use the power
point.
The 110–volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical
devices that require up to 150 watts. Exceeding the 150–watt limit will
cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide
overload protection.
The power point is located on the
back of the center console.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

192

Auxiliary Power Points

The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices that process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated or shorted. Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting conditions. Let the system cool off, then
turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition.
The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the
indicator light is on. The indicator light is located in the top left corner
of the power point.
When the indicator light is:
• on — power point is ready to supply power
• off — power point power supply is off; ignition is not on
• blinking — power point is in fault mode

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Storage Compartments

193

CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during
hard braking, acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
• Locking storage compartment
with hanging file folder supports
• Utility compartment with coin
holder slots, cardholder and pen
holder (on underside of lid).
• Storage for laptop computer
• One 12-volt power point inside
the storage compartment and one
on the rear of the console
• 110-volt AC power point outlet on the rear of the console
• Front and rear cupholders
• Rear passenger air registers

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

194

Starting and Stopping the Engine

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately.
Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after
you connect it. This is because the engine management system must
realign itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
or radio noise.
Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine. If you have
difficulty starting the engine, see Failure to start later in this section.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Starting and Stopping the Engine

195

IGNITION SWITCH

C
B
D
A

A. Off: The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not
leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to
lose charge.
B. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long.
This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.
C. On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D. Start: Cranks the engine.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm
up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
• Turn the ignition key to the on position.
Some warning lights briefly illuminate.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to start the engine. Release the key
when the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it
starts.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

196

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short
period and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
2. Turn the key to the off position.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: When you switch off the engine when your vehicle is
still moving, this results in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering does not lock, but higher effort is required. When you
switch off the ignition, some electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off.
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes
to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever
to position P and turn the key to the off position.
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E-85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline).
If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E-85 ethanol.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Starting and Stopping the Engine

197

Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E-85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E-85 ethanol nor an engine block heater
is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank improves cold
starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on E-85 ethanol
alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the Preceding Instructions
(Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to
start, repeat Step 1.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you
smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

198

Starting and Stopping the Engine

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120–volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified
by Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association.
This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of
combustibles.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Starting and Stopping the Engine

199

• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer
than three hours does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

200

Fuel and Refueling

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel, such as
gasoline, is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

201

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance; repairs may not be
covered under warranty.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 15% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel-methanol,
leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the
emission control system.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. The use of leaded fuel
is prohibited by law.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

202

Fuel and Refueling

Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel
placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Flex fuel vehicles are designed to use unleaded gasoline or an ethanol
fuel blend that contain up to 85% ethanol. It is also acceptable to use
any mixture of unleaded gasoline and ethanol fuel that contains up to
85% ethanol. An ethanol fuel blend that contains 85% ethanol is labeled
as E85 at the service station.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel
as possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons
(18.9 liters) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 kilometers) to allow the vehicle
to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you exclusively use
E85 fuel, it is recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
Octane recommendations
3.7L V6/5.0L V8/6.2L V8 engines
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
octane levels below 87 are not recommended. Premium fuel will provide
improved performance and is recommended for severe duty usage such
as trailer tow.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily while you are
using fuel with the recommended
(R+M)/2 METHOD
octane rating, see your authorized
dealer to prevent any engine damage.

87

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

203

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
See Settings in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on
calculating DTE (Distance to empty).
Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel® system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the
ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel®
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
With the Easy Fuel® “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

204

Fuel and Refueling
1. Locate the white plastic funnel. In SuperCab and
Super Crew vehicles, it is located under the second
row driver side seat near the spare tire tool box.
On regular cab vehicles, the funnel is located
behind the driver seat.

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel® system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel® system and can damage it. The included funnel has been
specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
REFUELING

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

205

Easy Fuel® “No Cap” Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel door by pulling the indent on the door.
3. Insert the fuel plug key (if equipped) into the locking plug and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping.
5. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
6. Reinstall the plug (if equipped) into the fuel fill inlet and turn the key
clockwise to lock.
Note: Do not overfill the tank or fuel spillage will occur.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the information display. See the Information
Displays chapter for more information.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to
close properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing
to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to
turn on as well.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

206

Fuel and Refueling

FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers)
of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2000 miles–3000 miles (3200 kilometers–
4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge
readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving
(city or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

207

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components
and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance
Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

208

Fuel and Refueling

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine.
By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects
the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel®
No Cap Fuel System in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city or highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at
the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with
the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and can lead to
more costly repairs.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

209

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle.
The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once the
engine is started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle
is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above
driving cycle will have to be repeated.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

210

Transmission

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Start the engine

+
-

1

2

M

D

N

R

P

T/H

• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. If your vehicle is equipped
with a floor-shift transmission, press the gearshift lever release button (on
the front of the lever) while shifting into the desired gear.
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Tow/Haul Off
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Transmission

211

D (Drive) with Tow/Haul On
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
Tow/Haul can be activated by pressing the transmission control switch on
the end of the gearshift lever (column-shift transmission) or on the side
of the gearshift lever (floor-shift transmission).
• Column-shift transmission
TOW/HAUL

• Floor-shift transmission
+
-

1

2

M

D

N

R

P

T/H

The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Drive) position; this engine braking will slow the
vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a
grade. Depending on driving conditions and load conditions, the transmission
may downshift, slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal being pressed. The amount
of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake
pedal is pressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated. Tow/haul will also deactivate when the
vehicle is powered down.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

212

Transmission

3 (Third) (column-shift only) (For vehicles without SST)
Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads.
2 (Second)
Transmission operates in 2nd gear only.
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads.
1 (First)
• Transmission operates in 1st gear only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Drive) only.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic® transmission
This vehicle may be equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) gearshift lever. The SST is an automatic transmission
with the ability for the driver to change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired. The SST feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Transmission

213

M (Manual)
Moving the gearshift lever from drive position D (Drive) to M (Manual)
gives you the ability to manually change gears. The current gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Press the (+)/(–) buttons on the gearshift lever to manually make shifts:
• Press (+) on the gearshift lever
button to manually upshift the
transmission.
+
• Press (–) on the gearshift lever
button to manually downshift the
transmission.
1

2

M

D

N

R

P

T/H

For vehicles equipped with the (+)/(–) buttons on the column shifter:
• Press (+) on the column shifter
button to manually upshift the
transmission.
TOW/HAUL
• Press (–) on the column shifter
button to manually downshift the
transmission.
When manual control is no longer desired, return the transmission to the
D (Drive) position.
The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
Recommended shift speeds:

1
2
3
4
5

–
–
–
–
–

2
3
4
5
6

Upshifts when accelerating
Shift from:
15 mph
25 mph
40 mph
45 mph
50 mph

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

(24
(40
(64
(72
(80

km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)

214

Transmission

In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM,
which may cause it to stall, the SST will still automatically make some
downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.
Although the SST will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow
you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the
engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
The SST will not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching
the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without
shifting.
PRS (Progressive Range Selection)
With the gearshift lever in D (Drive), press the – button to active PRS.
The available and selected gears will be indicated on the instrument
cluster.
All available gears will be displayed with the current gear indicated.
Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears.
Only the available gears will be displayed and the transmission will
automatically shift between the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within the gear range you select.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Transmission

215

Brake-shift interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 3 (on) position and the brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
the Fuses chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P (Park):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the ignition key to 1 (off), then remove
the key.
2. Move the steering column to the full down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

216

Transmission

4. Place fingers into hole where the gearshift lever boot was removed
from and pull top half of shroud up and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a hinge at the forward edge of the top
shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud upward on the hinge point to
clear the hazard flasher button, then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners
under the column that secure the
lower shroud half to the column.

7. Pull the lock lever into the full
unlocked position and remove the
lower shroud cover by pulling the
lever handle through the slot in the
cover.

8. Apply the brake and move the gearshift lever into N (Neutral).
9. Start the vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order, making sure to engage the
hinge pivots between the upper and lower halves of the shroud. Keep
slight pressure in the forward direction as the halves are rotated
together.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Transmission

217

Brake-Shift Interlock – Floor-Shifter Assembly
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking
the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
the Fuses chapter for more information.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P (Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
2. Starting at the rear of the trim
panel, using a screwdriver (or similar
tool) carefully pry up the trim panel
from rear attachments and disconnect
it from the console to expose the
inside of the gearshift.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

218

Transmission

3. Locate the brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift lever
out of the P (Park) position and into
the N (Neutral) position.
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Transmission

219

WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling
the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active,
the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
Hill start assist keeps your vehicle stationary long enough to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal when your vehicle is
on a slope.
The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed
sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or
three seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you
are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

220

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED )
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see General Information in the Wheels
and Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive
components. 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal
and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L
(4X4 Low) for proper operation.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the reconfigurable
telltale (RTT) location under the following conditions. Refer to Warning
Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically
remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition
occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this
warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
4X2 - Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected.
4X4 AUTO - Continuously illuminates when 4A is selected
(2-Speed Automatic 4WD vehicles only)
4X4 HIGH - Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected.
4X4 LOW - Continuously illuminates when 4L is selected.
CHECK 4X4 - Displays when a 4X4 fault is present.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

221

Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
2H (4X2) - Delivers power to the
2H
rear wheels only. This mode is
4H
appropriate for normal on-road
4L
driving and provides the best fuel
economy and smoothness.

4H (4X4 HIGH) - provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power
to the front and rear wheels. This position is not recommended for use
on dry pavement. This position is only intended for off-road or winter
conditions, such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand.
Note: Do not use 4H (4X4 HIGH) on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so
can produce excessive noise and increased tire wear. 4H (4X4 HIGH) is
only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces.
4L (4X4 LOW) - Provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive
when extra power at reduced speeds is required. This position is not
recommended for use on dry pavement. Use this position for off-road
low-speed operation or when extra power is required, such as climbing
steep grades, going through deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
4L (4X4 LOW) will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 LOW) for proper operation.
Note: Do not use 4L (4X4 LOW) on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so
can produce excessive noise and increased tire wear. 4L (4X4 LOW) is
only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

222

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 High)
Move the 4WD control between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 HIGH) at
any forward speed. The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS during the system shift. 4X4 HIGH will display in the
message center if 4H is selected and 4X2 will momentarily display
in the message center if 2H is selected.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center during the mode shift, transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward
gear and move the vehicle forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters) to
allow the transfer case to complete the mode shift.
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while performing a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the
shift. The message center will then display the system mode selected.
If any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur
and the message center will display information guiding the driver
through the proper shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

223

Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD System (If Equipped)
This system includes an
electronically controlled transfer
case with a high capacity clutch.
The system is interactive with the
road, continually monitoring and
adjusting torque delivery to the
front and rear wheels to optimize
traction.

• 2H (4X2) - delivers power to the rear wheels only. This mode is
appropriate for normal on-road driving on dry pavement and provides
best fuel economy and smoothness.
• 4A (4X4 AUTO) - provides electronic control four-wheel drive with
power delivered to the front and rear wheels, as required, for increased
traction. This is appropriate for all on-road driving conditions, including as
dry road surfaces, but is especially useful on wet pavement, snow, dirt, or
gravel.
• 4H (4X4 HIGH) - provides electronically locked four-wheel drive
power to front and rear wheels. This position is not recommended for
use on dry pavement. This position is only intended for severe winter
or off-road conditions, such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand. Note:
Do not use 4H (4X4 HIGH) on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can
produce excessive noise and increased tire wear. 4H (4X4 HIGH) is
only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of 4H
(4X4 HIGH) on these surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but will not damage drive components.
• 4L (4X4 LOW) - provides electronically locked four-wheel drive
when extra power at reduced speeds is required. This position is not
recommended for use on dry pavement. Use this position for off-road
low-speed operation or when extra power is required, such as climbing
steep grades, going through deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
4L (4X4 LOW) will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 LOW) for proper operation.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

224

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Note: Do not use 4L (4X4 LOW) on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so
can produce excessive noise and increased tire wear. 4L (4X4 LOW) is
only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of 4L (4X4
LOW) on these surfaces may produce some noise (such as occasional
clunks), but will not damage drive components.
Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the ability to take over control of
the transfer case clutch and disable it during driving maneuvers when
necessary.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4A (4WD AUTO) or 4H (4X4 HIGH )
Move the control from 2H to 4A or 4H at a stop or while driving at
any forward speed. The message center may display 4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS during the system shift. The message center will then display
4X4 AUTO if 4A has been selected or 4X4 HIGH if 4H is selected. The
message center will momentarily display 4X2 if 2H has been selected.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting between 4A (4WD AUTO) and 4H (4X4 HIGH)
Move the control from 4A to 4H at a stop or while driving at any speed.
The message center will display 4X4 AUTO if 4A has been selected and
4X4 HIGH if 4H has been selected.
Note: 4x4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 LOW)
1. Bring the vehicle to a rolling speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the
shift. The message center will then display the system mode selected.
If any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur
and the message center will display information guiding the driver
through the proper range of shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters), and shift the transmission back
to neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

225

Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement
Electronic Locking Differential (ELD) (If Equipped)
Note: The ELD is designed for off-road use only and is not intended for
use on dry pavement. Using the ELD on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is a device housed in the rear
axle which allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. The ELD
can provide additional traction should the vehicle become stuck. The
ELD is electronically activated by the driver and can be shifted on the fly
within the ELD operating speed range. It is intended for use in mud,
rocks, sand, or any off-road condition where maximum traction is
needed. It is not intended for use on dry pavement.
The ELD is affected by the following conditions:
• The ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h) in 4x2, 4x4 Auto, or 4x4 High modes.
• The ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above or 56 mph
(90 km/h) in 4X4 Low.
• The ELD will not engage if the accelerator pedal is pressed beyond
50% during an engagement attempt
• In 4x2, 4x4 Auto, and 4x4 High modes, the ELD will automatically
disengage at speeds above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will automatically
reengage at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• In 4L (4X4 low), the ELD will automatically disengage at speeds above
62 mph (100 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below
56 mph (90 km/h).
• The AdvanceTrac system has the ability to take over control of the
ELD and disable it during driving maneuvers when necessary.
If the required conditions for ELD activation are not met when the
switch is actuated, the instrument cluster will display the appropriate
information guiding the driver through the proper ELD activation
process.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

226

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Activating the Electronic Locking Differential
Note: Do not use ELD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise and vibration and increase tire wear.
Note: If the ELD has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
The ELD can be turned on by pulling the 4WD
2H
control knob toward you (4x4 vehicles) or by
4H
turning the ELD control knob from OFF to ON
4L
(4x2 vehicles).
PULL

Once the indicator light is displayed in the message center,
both rear wheel axle shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the indicator turns off while
driving, one of the following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and will be accompanied by a CHECK
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL message in the information displays screen.
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

227

Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside.
Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles
Note: On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to
four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary
clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for
concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can
become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your
vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken off by removing two bolts.
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be
found in the Maintenance chapter. You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

228

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

For vehicles equipped with a 3.5L Ecoboost™ engine:
Your vehicle is equipped with an underbody transmission shield and
brackets that may become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance)
when taking your vehicle off-road. Remove the shield by disengaging the
fasteners at each corner of the shield. Then, remove the shield rear
brackets by removing the bracket to frame bolts, or have your authorized
dealer perform the work for you.
Basic Operating Principles In Special Conditions
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and
slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

229

If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts,
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle, i.e., turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake
pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called
for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle
to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

230

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Mud and water
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud.
As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the
direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Tread Lightly is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service
and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve
our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

231

Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. . A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss
of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application and
brake overheating. Do not descend in
neutral; instead, disengage overdrive
or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could lose
control. When you brake hard, the
front wheels can’t turn and if they
aren’t turning, you won’t be able to
steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
pump the brakes.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

232

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Driving on snow and ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears.
In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not pump the
brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information
on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

233

Parking
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
Maintenance and modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

234

Brakes

GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may
be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If your
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, you should take it to an authorized dealer for inspection.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to
position P and apply the parking brake, then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency
as long as you press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Brakes

235

Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The anti-lock brake system lamp momentarily illuminates when
the ignition is turned on. If the light does not illuminate during
start-up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may
be disabled and may need to be serviced.
If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the dangers inherent
when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that
the transmission selector lever is securely latched in position P.
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated
until the parking brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of
the instrument panel.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

236

Traction Control

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud), turning the
traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin
with full engine power.
Turn the traction control system off by pressing the
stability control button located on the center of the
instrument panel.

System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction
Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled
using the stability control button. If the stability control light still
illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with Traction Control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Stability Control

237

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction or wheel and tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac® system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac®
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac® sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac® system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac® system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your AdvanceTrac® system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system helps you keep
control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The electronic stability
control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and roll
stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The traction control system
helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. See the Traction Control
chapter for details on traction control system operation.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

238

Stability Control
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac®
with RSC® skidding off its intended
route.
B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac® with
RSC® maintaining control on a
slippery surface.

USING ADVANCETRAC® WITH RSC®
The system automatically activates when you start your engine. The
electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system
can be turned off below 35 mph (56 km/h) and are disabled when the
transmission is in position R.You can turn off the traction control portion of
the system independently. See the Traction Control chapter.
AdvanceTrac® with RSC® Features
Stability
Button
control
RSC®
ESC
functions
OFF light
Illuminated
Default at
during bulb
Enabled
Enabled
start-up
check
Button pressed Illuminated
Enabled
Enabled1
momentarily
solid

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

TCS

Enabled
Disabled1

Stability Control

Button
functions

239

AdvanceTrac® with RSC® Features
Stability
RSC®
ESC
control
OFF light

Button pressed
and held for
Flashes then
more than
5 seconds at
illuminated
solid2
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
Vehicle speed
exceeds
35 mph
(56 km/h)
Illuminated
after button is
solid
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds
Button pressed
Not
again after
illuminated
deactivation
Transfer case
switched to
Illuminated
4WD Low
Locked3

TCS

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled4

Enabled

Enabled1

Disabled1

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled4

1

Traction control system could be enabled but with higher entry
thresholds compared to full system. Electronic stability control entry
thresholds are higher compared to full system.
2
Lamp light starts blinking for three seconds after entering press and
hold state.
3
Control switch is not pressed. Stability control light turned on when
4WD low locked transfer case mode selected.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control
functions are disabled. Single wheel spin traction control is always
enabled.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

240

Terrain Response

HILL DESCENT CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all
surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely
steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at
zero mph (0 km/h). When stopped, the parking brake must be
applied and/or the vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it may roll
away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed
while descending steep grades in various surface conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades
between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of
sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The system will provide a warning
in the message center and a chime will sound when the system is about
to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as
needed to maintain descent speed.
To enable hill descent control and set the descent speed, do the
following:
1. Press and release the hill descent button located on the
instrument panel. A light in the control will illuminate and
chime will sound when this feature is activated.
2. To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until the
desired speed is reached. To decrease descent speed, press the brake
pedal until the desired speed is reached.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Terrain Response

241

Whether accelerating or decelerating, once the desired descent speed is
reached, remove your feet from the pedals and the chosen vehicle speed
will be maintained.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may be observed during hill
descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and
should be no reason for concern.
Hill descent modes
• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the hill decent control
button is pressed and hill decent control is active, HILL DESCENT
CONTROL ACTIVE will appear in the message center for several
seconds.
• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the hill decent control
button is pressed and conditions are not correct for hill descent
activation, the HDC system will be enabled, the light on the button
will be on solid and HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY will be
displayed in the message center for several seconds.
• At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h): When the hill decent control
button is pressed, the hill decent control system will be enabled, the
light on the button will be illuminated, and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20 MPH
OR LESS will be displayed in the message center for several seconds.
• For hill decent control to enable, the vehicle must be in a drive gear
or (R) Reverse. If the vehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the
hill decent control button is pressed, FOR HILL CNTRL, SELECT
GEAR will be displayed in the message center for several seconds.
Refer to Warning lamps and indicators in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for hill descent control messages.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

242

Parking Aids

SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s
accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey®, it is possible to prevent
turning the sensing system off. Refer to the MyKey® chapter.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a fully integrated electronic trailer
brake controller (TBC) and a trailer with electric trailer brakes is connected
to your vehicle, the RSS will be disabled. When the vehicle is shifted into
reverse, the message center display will remain in the Rear Park Aid Off
selection. For more information on the TBC, refer to the Towing chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Parking Aids

243

The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning
increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25 centimeters) away,
the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or receding object is
detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).

A

The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R
(Reverse):
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

244

Parking Aids

REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the
tailgate.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Parking Aids

245

Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses two types of
guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:
1. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the
vehicle.
2. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object
(i.e. a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen.
In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not
operating.
• The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Adjusting the Rear View Camera Settings
Touch screen display:
To access the rear view camera system settings, make the following
selections when the transmission is not in R (Reverse):
1. Menu
2. Vehicle
3. Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch screen shows a preview of the
feature(s) selected.
Rearview mirror display:
To access the rear view camera system settings see the Information
Display chapter.
The guidelines options are FIXED and OFF. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rearview mirror display and a standard instrument cluster, the
fixed guidelines will always remain on. There is no option to turn the
fixed guidelines off.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

246

Parking Aids

Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in
R (Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed guidelines are on.
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
D
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
C
E
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
E. Centerline
A
B

The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror
to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in
R (Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The visual park aid alert allows the driver to view the area that is being
detected by the reverse sensing system. The system uses red, yellow and
green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object
is detected by the reverse sensing system. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and
if visual park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Parking Aids

247

Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind the
vehicle is not shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using
the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline is shown.
Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle.
The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a
reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R
(Reverse). When the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse), the
feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again.
Touch screen display (if equipped)
Do the following to turn the manual zoom feature on or off:
1. Place the vehicle in R (Reverse).
2. Select Zoom on the touch screen display.
3. You can choose from OFF, Level 1, 2 or 3.
The selected level will appear between the buttons (i.e. Level 1). When
activating manual zoom mode, the system always starts from OFF.
Rearview mirror display (if equipped)
To turn the manual zoom feature on or off see the Information Displays
chapter.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear
other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until the
vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting
for the rear camera delay is OFF.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

248

Cruise Control

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if your vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The speed controls are located on
the steering wheel.
SET
CNCL
RSM

ON
OFF

Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.

Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET +.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Cruise Control

249

Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed
will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return
to the speed that you previously set.
• Press and hold SET + or SET –. Release the control when you reach
the desired speed.
• Press and release SET + or SET –. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET +.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

250

Driving Aids

STEERING
Electric power steering (3.7L, 5.0L and 3.5L EcoBoost™ engines)
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation. When a system error is detected the following message
Service Power Steering, Service Power Steering Now or Power Steering
Assist Fault may appear in the information display.
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostics
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation of the electronic system. When an electronic error is detected,
Power Steering Assist Fault will be displayed in the information display.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine.
After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by restarting the engine, and
watch the information display for Power Steering Assist Fault. If the
message returns, or returns while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the message displayed, the steering assist is turned
off, making the vehicle harder to steer.
WARNING: If Service Power Steering is displayed in the
information display, a problem with the system function has been
detected. On the next key cycle Service Power Steering Now will be
displayed and steering assist will be removed until the steering system is
serviced. Have your vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Obtain immediate service if a system error is
detected. You may not notice any difference in the feel of your
steering, but a serious condition may exist. Failure to do so may result
in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power-assisted steering system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the ignition
is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to
steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to
your steering system. If this should occur, you will neither lose the ability to
steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering
assist will return to normal.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Driving Aids

251

When a steering system error is detected, the following messages may
appear in the information display:
• Service Power Steering
• Service Power Steering Now
• Power Steering Assist Fault
Hydraulic steering (6.2L engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic steering system.
To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the
steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than
a few seconds when the engine is running. If the power steering system
breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle
manually, but it takes more effort.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

252

Load Carrying

LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door (vehicles exported
outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as
built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or authorized-dealer installed
equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment
must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

253

WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

254

Load Carrying

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating
position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The GVW must never exceed
the GVWR.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

255

• Example only:

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

256

Load Carrying

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation
at GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

257

WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends
average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load
capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

258

Load Carrying

• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with
the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags
of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement
to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

259

TAILGATE
Tailgate Lock (If Equipped)
The tailgate lock is designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
Insert the ignition key into the
tailgate lock. Turn it to the right to
lock or to the left to unlock the
tailgate.

Tailgate Removal
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting
cargo or cargo falling from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle
occupants or others.
Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, do Steps 1 through 3
before removing the tailgate.
1. Before removing the tailgate, locate
and disconnect the tailgate in-line
connector. It is located under the
pickup box on the passenger side of
the vehicle near the spare tire.
2. Install a protective cap (located
in the glove box) onto the in-line
rearview camera system connector
that remains under the pickup box.
3. Partially lower the tailgate and carefully feed the tailgate harness up
through the gap between the pickup box and the bumper. Place the
tailgate harness out of the way under the pickup box.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

260

Load Carrying

4. Lower the tailgate.
5. Using a screwdriver, gently pry
the spring clip (on each connector)
past the head of the support screw.
Disconnect the cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift the right side off of its hinge.
9. Lift the tailgate to an 80-degree angle from horizontal.
10. Remove the tailgate from the left side hinge by sliding the tailgate to
the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Tailgate Step (If Equipped)
This feature allows easier entry into the truck bed.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
• Operate the step only when the vehicle is on a level surface.
• Operate the step only in areas with sufficient lighting.
• Always open the flip panel to widen step.
• Always use the grab handle when stepping up and down.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Keep the step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud).
• Keep the step load (you plus the load) below 350 pounds
(159 kilograms).
• Never drive with the step deployed.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

261

Opening the Tailgate Step
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the unlock position to release
the grab handle from its stowed position.
3. Raise the handle upright until you
feel it latch and see the latch lever in
the lock position. The yellow lever
only needs to be used when releasing
the grab handle.

4. Rotate the center molding to
unlatch the tailgate step and pull it
toward you to extend it.
5. Flip open the step panel to widen
the step.

Close the Tailgate Step
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
Note:
• Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
•
•
•
•

Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
Replace the slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
Replace the handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
Do not tow with the grab handle or step frame.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

262

Load Carrying

Box Side Step (If Equipped)
The box side step allows easier access to the truck bed.
Note: Do not drive the vehicle with a box side step in the deployed
position.
Note: The box side step load carrying capability (one person plus cargo)
is 500 pounds (227 kilograms). Do not exceed this amount.
Note: Do not use the box side steps to lift the vehicle when jacking.
Utilize proper jacking points.
Note: The box side steps may operate slower in cooler temperatures.
Debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt may become trapped in the
box side step mechanism. This may cause the box side step to not
deploy automatically after pressing the button. If this occurs, make sure
that the button is pressed down and carefully manually pull out the box
side step. Wash off the debris with a high-pressure car wash wand and
re-stow the step.
To deploy the box side step, push
down on the button with your foot.
The step will automatically extend
out from the stowed position.

To stow the box side step, push the
box side step under the truck with
your foot until it is fully latched.
Do not push on the button while
stowing the box side step.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

263

BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
Note: Make sure the locking pins and knobs are fully engaged when the
vehicle is in motion.
Note: Make sure all cargo is secured.
Note: The tailgate load must not exceed 150 pounds (68 kilograms)
when the vehicle is in motion.
Note: The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or
stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the
purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode.
To open the bed extender into tailgate mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.

2. Open the latches to release the
panels.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

264

Load Carrying
3. Rotate the panels toward the
tailgate.

Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.
4. Connect the two panels, then
rotate both knobs a quarter-turn
clockwise to secure the panels.

5. Make sure the latch rod is
inserted into the tailgate hole and
the locking pins on both sides are
engaged into their holes in the
pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

265

To open the bed extender into
grocery mode, follow Steps 1–4 by
rotating the panels away from the
tailgate. Close the tailgate.

POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may
occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Be sure that
the running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing
any object under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the
extended running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies,
running board motors, or the running board under body mounts to lift
the vehicle when jacking. Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures.
Debris such as mud, dirt and salt may become trapped in the running
board mechanism, possibly leading to unwanted noise. If this occurs,
manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flush the
system (in particular the front and rear hinge arms) with a high-pressure
car wash wand.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

266

Load Carrying
The running boards automatically
move when the doors are opened to
assist entering and exiting the
vehicle.

Automatic Power Deploy
The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are
opened.
Automatic Power Stow
The running boards will return to the stowed position after a two second
delay when the doors are closed.
Manual Power Deploy
To manually operate the running boards, refer to the Information
Displays chapter.
• This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed
(OUT) position for access to the roof.
• When running boards are manually set in the deployed position, they
will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enable and Disable
To enable and disable the power running board feature, refer to the
Information Displays chapter.
• When this feature is disabled (OFF), the running boards will move to
the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors.
• When this feature is enabled (AUTO), the running boards will move
back to the correct positions based off of the door positions.
Bounce-Back
If an object is in the way of the moving running board, it will reverse
direction and move to the end of travel.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

267

TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when
driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side
trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. You can
find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter
and in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide, available at an authorized
dealer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

268

Towing

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it
begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may turn
on multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if
necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the
stability control light flashes. The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper
tongue load and trailer load distribution. See the Load Carrying chapter
for specific loading information.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5000 pounds (2268 kilograms)
when towing with, or by, bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5000 pounds (2268 kilograms) if
your vehicle is not equipped with a Heavy-duty Trailer Towing Package.
Note: The total area in square feet (meters) exposed to air resistance of
a moving vehicle and its trailer is the trailer frontal area. Consider the
following trailer frontal area limitations when selecting a trailer based on
your vehicle configuration:
• Equal to the base vehicle frontal area on vehicles not equipped with
the Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy Duty Payload Package.
• 60 feet2 (5.57 meters2) on vehicles equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package or the Heavy Duty Payload Package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

269

Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle’s electrical system may not include the
wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II, III or IV trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model
and axle ratio. See the following charts.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such as a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
Further trailer and hitch restrictions exist depending on the type of
trailer and hitch listed. This information follows the table listing the
maximum gross combined weight ratings.
Engine

Regular Cab
Rear axle ratio

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
Two–wheel drive 126–inch wheelbase
3.7L
3.55
10400 (4717)
3.73
10900 (4944)
5.0L
3.31
12900 (5851)
3.55
13300 (6033)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

270

Towing
Engine

Regular Cab
Rear axle ratio

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
Four–wheel drive 126–inch wheelbase
3.7L
3.73
10900 (4944)
5.0L
3.55
12900 (5851)
3.73
13300 (6033)
Two–wheel drive 145–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.15
14000 (6350)
3.55
15000 (6804)
3.5L (Heavy Duty
3.73
16600 (7530)
Payload Package)
3.7L
3.55
10600 (4808)
3.73
11100 (5035)
5.0L
3.31
13500 (6123)
3.55
14900 (6759)
5.0L (Heavy Duty
3.73
15300 (6940)
Payload Package)
Four–wheel drive 145–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.31
14000 (6350)
3.55 and 3.73
15200 (6895)
3.5L (Heavy Duty
3.73
16900 (7666)
Payload Package)
3.7L
3.73
11100 (5035)
5.0L
3.55
13500 (6123)
3.73
15100 (6849)
5.0L (Heavy Duty
3.73
15300 (6940)
Payload Package)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing
Engine

SuperCab
Rear axle ratio

271

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
Four–wheel drive 133–inch wheelbase
6.2L (SVT Raptor)
4.10
12500 (5670)
Two–wheel drive 145–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.15
14000 (6350)
3.55
15200 (6895)
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
16900 (7666)
Package)
3.7L
3.73
11100 (5035)
5.0L
3.31
13500 (6123)
3.55
14900 (6759)
6.2L
3.55
15500 (7031)
3.73
17000 (7711)
Four–wheel drive 145–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.31
14000 (6350)
3.55 and 3.73
15400 (6985)
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73 and 4.10
17100 (7756)
Package)
3.7L
3.73
11100 (50335)
5.0L
3.55
13500 (6123)
3.73
15100 (6849)
6.2L
3.55
15600 (7076)
3.73
17100 (7756)
Two–wheel drive 163–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.15
14000 (6350)
3.55
15200 (6895)
3.5L (Heavy Duty
3.73
17100 (7756)
Payload Package)
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
17100 (7756)
Package)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

272

Towing
Engine
5.0L

SuperCab
Rear axle ratio
3.31
3.55
3.73

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
13500 (6123)
14900 (6759)
15300 (6940)

5.0L (Heavy Duty
Payload Package)
Four–wheel drive 163–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.31
14000
3.55 and 3.73
15400
3.5L (Heavy Duty
3.73
17100
Payload Package)
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73 and 4.10
17100
Package)
5.0L
3.55
13500
3.73
15100
5.0L (Heavy Duty
3.73
15300
Payload Package)
Engine

SuperCrew
Rear axle ratio

(6350)
(6985)
(7756)
(7756)
(6123)
(6849)
(6940)

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
Two–wheel drive 145–inch wheelbase
3.5L (Limited)
3.73
13300 (6033)
3.5L
3.15
14000 (6350)
3.55
15300 (6940)
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
16900 (7666)
Package)
3.7L
3.73
11100 (5035)
5.0L
3.31 and 3.55
13500 (6123)
3.73
14900 (6759)
6.2L (Limited)
3.73
13500 (6123)
6.2L
3.55
15600 (7076)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing
Engine

SuperCrew
Rear axle ratio

273
Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
17100 (7756)

6.2L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
Package)
Four–wheel drive 145–inch wheelbase
3.5L (Limited)
3.73
13400
3.5L
3.31
14000
3.55 and 3.73
15500
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73 and 4.10
17100
Package)
5.0L
3.55
13500
3.73
15100
6.2L (Limited)
3.73
13500
6.2L (SVT Raptor)
4.10
14700
6.2L
3.55
15600
6.2L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
17100
Package)
Two–wheel drive 157–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.15
14000
3.55
15300
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
17000
Package)
3.5L (Heavy Duty
3.73
17100
Payload Package)
5.0L
3.31 and 3.55
13500
3.73
14900
5.0L (Heavy Duty
3.73
15300
Payload Package)
6.2L
3.55
15600
6.2L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
17100
Package)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

(6078)
(6350)
(7031)
(7756)
(6123)
(6849)
(6123)
(6668)
(7076)
(7756)

(6350)
(6940)
(7711)
(7756)
(6123)
(6759)
(6940)
(7076)
(7756)

274

Towing
Engine

SuperCrew
Rear axle ratio

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
Four–wheel drive 157–inch wheelbase
3.5L
3.31
14000 (6350)
3.55 and 3.73
15500 (7031)
3.5L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73 and 4.10
17100 (7756)
Package)
3.5L (Heavy Duty
3.73
17100 (7756)
Payload Package)
5.0L
3.55
13500 (6123)
3.73
15100 (6849)
5.0L (Heavy Duty
3.73
15300 (6940)
Payload Package)
6.2L
3.55
15600 (7076)
6.2L (MAX Trailer Tow
3.73
17100 (7756)
Package)
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your
vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

275

Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the
tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender. This is H1.
3. Securely attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the
weight-distributing bars connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that
the height of your vehicle’s front wheel opening on the fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat
Steps 2–6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the
hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by
law or the trailer manufacturer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

276

Towing

Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle’s braking system operation is at
the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight
rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible
with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes (one to four axles)
and some electric-over-hydraulic (EOH) brakes. It will not activate
hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes. It is the responsibility of the customer
to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning
normally and all electric connections are properly made. Failure to do so
may result in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

277

When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth
and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.

TRAILER BRAKE

A

B

The controller user interface consists of the following:
A. + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts
the controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
You can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or
decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises
or lowers the setting continuously. The gain setting displays in the
message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph, and trailer
connectivity status in the information display. They appear in the
information display as follows:
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: Shows the current gain setting
during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments
with no trailer connected.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = / / / / / /: Displays when you push
your vehicle’s brake pedal, or when you use the manual control. Bar
indicators illuminate in the information display to indicate the amount
of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a
correct trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes)
during a given ignition cycle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

278

Towing

• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays, accompanied by a single
audible chime, when the system senses a trailer connection and then
a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional, during a given
ignition cycle. It also displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs
causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control lever without a trailer
connected.
B. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to turn on
the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s brakes. See
the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the brake
is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent
to the trailer brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever illuminates both the
trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps except the center
high-mount stop lamp, if you make the proper electrical connection
to the trailer. Pressing your vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake controller for the specific towing
condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change.
Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance
while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic
brakes, TRAILER CONNECTED appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease
the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

279

6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the
gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford
warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: Displays in response to faults
sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single chime.
If this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: Displays when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
message displays, accompanied by a single chime, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring between the trailer
brake controller and the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the message
only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to
ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin
on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be
drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without
consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the
first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road,
weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when
the gain was initially set.
• Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain
during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway,
could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake
controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels.
Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

280

Towing

• The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and
vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your vehicle’s brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain
control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on
different road conditions.
• Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes
whether you attach a trailer or not.
• When you turn the engine off, the controller output is disabled and
the display and module shut down. The controller module and display
turn on when you turn the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or
dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the
vehicle’s tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system
resulting in a fire. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5000-pound (2268 kilogram) trailer weight and a 500-pound (227 kilogram)
tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball position, you must install a
frame-mounted trailer hitch.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

281

When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and
to help A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul
feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac™ with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded
trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while
towing may reduce this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions,
at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these
factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant
(if the axle is not already filled with it). See the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate
stops and brake gradually.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

282

Towing

• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. A “temporary” spare tire is different in size (diameter or width),
tread-type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from
the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in
water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which does
not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other
axle repair is required.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

283

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company
has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel drive vehicle towed with the
front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the
ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

284

Towing

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed
(all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. See Automatic transmission in the
Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into N.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you need to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle, such as a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your vehicle and its transmission after it is hooked-up to the
recreational vehicle or tow dolly.
You cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehicle with any wheels on the ground
as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. You must tow your vehicle
with all four wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling
trailer.
You can only tow a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels on the
ground by placing the transfer case in its neutral position and engaging
the four-wheel-down towing feature. Perform the steps outlined in the
Four-wheel-down towing section after positioning your vehicle behind
the tow vehicle and properly securing them together

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Towing

285

Four-wheel-down Towing
1. Turn the ignition to the on position. Do not start the engine.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the 4WD switch to 2H.
4. Shift the transmission to position N.
5. Rotate the 4WD switch from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five times
within seven seconds.
• If completed successfully, the information display shows
NEUTRAL TOW LEAVE IN N or NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED
LEAVE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL. This indicates that
your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground.
• If you do not see the message in the display, you must perform
the procedure again from the beginning.
• You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts into its
neutral position. This is normal.
6. Leave the transmission in position N and turn the ignition as far as it
will go toward the off position (it will not turn fully off when the
transmission is in position N. You must leave the key in the ignition
while towing. To lock and unlock your vehicle, use the keyless entry
keypad or extra set of keys.
7. Release the brake pedal.
WARNING: Do not disconnect the battery during recreational
towing. Doing so will prevent the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer case to its neutral position for
recreational towing may cause the vehicle to be able to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured.
Make sure the foot brake is depressed and the vehicle is in a secure
and safe position while the transfer case is being shifted to its neutral
position.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

286

Towing
WARNING: Failing to put the transfer case in its neutral position
will damage vehicle components.

Note: You can check four-wheel-down towing status at any time by
opening the driver’s door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on
position and verifying the NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED message displays
in the cluster.
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return the transfer case to its 2H
position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured to the tow vehicle, press and
hold the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to the on position. Do not start the engine.
3. Shift the transmission out of N and into any gear.
4. Release the brake pedal.
• If completed successfully, the instrument cluster displays 4X2,
and NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
• If the indicator light and message do not display, you must
perform the procedure again from the beginning.
• You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its
neutral position. This is normal.
5. Apply the parking brake, and then disconnect the vehicle from the
tow vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the engine, and shift the
transmission to position D to make sure the transfer case is out of
position N.
7. If the transfer case does not successfully shift out of position N, set
the parking brake until you can have your vehicle serviced.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

287

BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles
(480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unique
driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through
the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

288

Driving Hints

• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors,
rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note:If you drove through deep water, check the transmission and
engine fluid. If water is found, replace the fluid.
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars).

Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

289

FLOOR MATS

WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle footwell
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of the
vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other
covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the
pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

290

Driving Hints
WARNING (Continued)

• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
SNOWPLOWING
For F-150 snowplow applications, Ford recommends the F-150 4x4
Regular Cab, SuperCrew Cab and SuperCab equipped with the 6.2 liter
engine.
Note: The F-150 3.5L and F–150 5.0L not recommended for
snowplowing.
Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an Alterer’s
Label on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
applies to Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 pounds (4,536 kilograms)
GVWR or less. This is the weight of permanently-attached auxiliary
equipment, such as snowplow frame-mounting hardware, that can be
added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to
FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may require the auxiliary equipment
installer additional safety certification responsibility. The Front
Accessory Reserve Capacity (FARC) is added for customer
convenience.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

291

• Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop
Manual.
• Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
• The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire
sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
• Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your authorized dealer for
additional information.
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Attached
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven
at least 500 miles (800 kilometers).
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when snowplowing.
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature: Attention to engine
temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are
above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and
monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance
information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

292

Driving Hints

Snowplowing with your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
WARNING: Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment
may effect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the
risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag
supplemental restraint system. The supplemental restrain system is
designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when
the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause damage to
the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible air bag
deployment.
Engine temperature while plowing
When driving with a plow, your engine may run at a higher temperature
than normal because the attached snowplow blade will restrict airflow to
the radiator.
If you are driving more than 15 miles (24 kilometers) at temperatures
above freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to
provide maximum airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving less than 15 miles (24 kilometers) at speeds up to
45 mph (72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about
blade position to provide maximum airflow.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

293

Transmission operation while plowing
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at
speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or
light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a minute. The transmission and tires may be damaged or the
engine can overheat.
Outside Air Temperature While Plowing
The outside air temperature reading can be inaccurate while plowing
with your vehicle due to the sensor air flow being blocked by the plow
blade.
A Ford wiring kit is available to relocated the OAT sensor to the plow
blade frame below the headlamp to provide accurate outside air
temperature readings. See your authorized dealer for more information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

294

Roadside Emergencies

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your owner’s manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• battery jump start.
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the disablement location or
to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to
an authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

295

Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the warranty
information in the glove box.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please see your warranty information or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

296

Roadside Emergencies

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flashers may run down your 12–volt
battery.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
Note: If your vehicle has the push button start system, press the
stop/start button twice to reactivate the fuel system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

297

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting
to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result,
the transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts.
This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process
will fully update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
2. Check all battery terminals. Remove the positive terminal cover
(if equipped) and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery
cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

298

Roadside Emergencies

Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the
1
positive (+) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the
3
assisting battery.
4
4. Make the final connection of the
2
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.

Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

299

Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
4
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
1
the positive (+) terminal of the
2
disabled vehicle’s battery.

3

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

300

Customer Assistance

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

301

• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

302

Customer Assistance

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to
the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety
of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

303

THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services
You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in
the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

304

Customer Assistance

UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In
those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle
service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce
a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer
Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the United States.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

305

If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin
Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800)
841-FORD (3673)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

306

Customer Assistance

If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require
additional assistance or clarification, please contact the
respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

307

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

308

Fuses

CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working, a fuse may have
blown. Blown fuses are identified by a
broken wire within the fuse. Check
the appropriate fuses before replacing
any electrical components.

15

Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating

Mini
fuses

Standard
fuses

Maxi
fuses

2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A

Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—

Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural

Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
Natural
Natural
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuses

309

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, see Changing the
Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.

The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
number
1

Fuse amp
rating
—

2

—

Protected components
Powertrain control module relay
(3.7L, 5.0L and 6.2L engines)
Starter relay

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

310

Fuses

Fuse or relay
number
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Fuse amp
rating
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

11

30A**
40A**
50A**

12
13
14
15

30A**
30A**
40A**
50A**

16

20A**

17
18
19
20
21

30A**
30A**
30A**
20A**
30A**

22

20A**

23
24
25

—
—
—

Protected components
Blower motor relay
Rear window defroster relay
Electric fan relay (high speed)
Trailer tow park lamp relay
Run/start relay
Fuel pump relay
Trailer tow battery charger relay
Powertrain control module relay
(3.5L engine)
Power running board motors
Electric fan (3.7L, 5.0L)
Electric fan (3.5L, 6.2L with max
trailer tow, SVT Raptor)
Starter relay power
Passenger power seat
Electric fan (3.7L, 5.0L)
Electric fan (3.5L, 6.2L with max
trailer tow, SVT Raptor)
High intensity discharge
headlamp – passenger side
Trailer brake control
Upfitter 1 (SVT Raptor)
Upfitter 2 (SVT Raptor)
4x4 module (electronic shift)
Trailer tow battery charge relay
power
Auxiliary power point (instrument
panel)
A/C clutch relay
Not used
Not used

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
26

Fuse amp
rating
10A*

27
28
29

20A*
10A*
10A*

30
31
32

10A*
15A*
40A**

33
34

40A**
40A**

50A**
35

20A**

36

30A**

37
38
39
40
41

—
—
—
—
15A*

42
43

5A*
15A*

311
Protected components

Powertrain control module – keep
alive power and relay coil,
canister vent solenoid (3.7L, 5.0L
and 6.2L engines)
Fuel pump relay power
Upfitter 4 (SVT Raptor)
4x4 integrated wheel end
solenoid
A/C clutch relay power
Run/start relay power
Rear window defroster relay
power, Heated mirror relay power
110 volt AC power point
Powertrain control module relay
power (3.7L, 5.0L and
6.2L engines)
Powertrain control module relay
power (3.5L engine)
High intensity discharge
headlamps – driver side
Roll stability control / Anti-lock
brake system
Trailer tow left stop/turn relay
Trailer tow right stop/turn relay
Trailer tow back-up lamps relay
Electric fan relay
Front camera washer
(SVT Raptor)
Run/start relay coil
Trailer tow back-up lamp relay
power

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

312

Fuses

Fuse or relay
number
44

Fuse amp
rating
15A*

45

10A*

46
47

10A*
60A**

48
49
50
51
52

20A**
30A**
—
40A**
5A*

53

5A*

54

5A*

55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

—
15A*
—
—
—
—
—
—
25A**
—

Protected components
Upfitter 3 (SVT Raptor), Trailer
tow power folding mirrors
Alternator sensor (3.5L, 3.7L and
5.0L engines)
Brake on/off switch
Roll stability control / Anti-lock
brake system module
Moonroof
Wiper relay power
Not used
Blower motor relay power
Run/start – Electronic power
assist steering, Blower relay coil
Run/start – Powertrain control
module
Run/start – 4x4 module, Back-up
lamps, Roll stability control
/Anti-lock brake system, Trailer
tow battery charge relay coil,
Rear window defroster relay coil,
Front camera washer relay coil
(SVT Raptor)
Not used
Heated mirrors
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Wiper motor relay
Electric fan relay power
Not used

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
65

Fuse amp
rating
20A**

66

20A**

67

20A**

68
69

25A**
30A**

70
71
72
73

—
20A**
20A**
20A**

74

30A**

75

15A*

25A*
76

20A*

20A*

313
Protected components

Auxiliary power point
(instrument panel)
Auxiliary power point
(inside center console)
Trailer tow park lamps relay
power
4x4 module, 4x2 elocker module
Front heated or heated/cooled
seats
Not used
Heated rear seats
Auxiliary power point (rear)
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps relay
power
Driver power seat/memory
module
Powertrain control module –
voltage power 1 (3.7L, 5.0L,
6.2L engines)
Powertrain control module –
voltage power 1 (3.5L engine)
Powertrain control module –
Voltage power 2 (General
powertrain components, Mass air
flow/Intake air temp sensor)
(3.7L, 5.0L, 6.2L engines)
Powertrain control module –
Voltage power 2 (General
powertrain components, Canister
vent solenoid) (3.5L engine)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

314

Fuses

Fuse or relay
number
77

Fuse amp
rating
10A*

78

15A*

20A*

79
5A*
80
—
81
—
82
—
83
—
84
—
85
—
*Mini fuse **Cartridge fuse

Protected components
Powertrain control module –
Voltage power 3 (Emission
related powertrain components,
Electric fan relays coil)
Powertrain control module –
Voltage power 4 – Ignition coils
(3.5L, 3.7L, 5.0L engines)
Powertrain control module –
Voltage power 4 – Ignition coils
(6.2L engine)
Rain sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Electric fan relay (low speed)

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel.
To remove the trim panel for access
to the fuse box, pull the panel toward
you and swing it out away from the
side and remove it. To reinstall it, line
up the tabs with the grooves on the
panel, then push it shut.

To remove the fuse box cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuses

315

To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

19

30

20

31

21

32

48

8
9
40

49
10
22

33

41

23

34

42

24

35

43

25

36

44

26

37

45

11
12
13
14
15
16

27

17

28

38

46

18

29

39

47

The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse or relay
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Fuse amp
rating
30A
15A
30A
10A
20A
5A
7.5A

8
9

10A
10A

Protected components
Driver side front window
SYNC , Display module (8 inch)
Passenger side front window
Interior lamps
Memory module
Not used (spare)
Power mirror switch, Memory seat
module
Not used (spare)
Radio display, GPS module,
Electric finish panel module

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

316

Fuses

Fuse or relay
number
10
11
12

Fuse amp
rating
10A
10A
15A

13
14
15

15A
15A
15A

16
17
18

10A
10A
10A

19
20
21
22
23
24

20A
20A
10A
20A
15A
15A

25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15A
5A
20A
15A
20A
15A
5A

Protected components
Run/accessory relay
Instrument cluster
Interior lighting, Puddle lamps,
Backlighting, Cargo lamp
Right turn signals/stop lamps
Left turn signals/stop lamps
Reverse lights, High-mounted stop
lamp
Right low-beam headlamp
Left low-beam headlamp
Brake-shift interlock, Keypad
illumination, Powertrain control
module wakeup, Passive anti-theft
system
Audio amplifier
Power door locks
Not used (spare)
Horn
Steering wheel control module
Datalink connector, Steering
wheel control module
Not used (spare)
Radio frequency module
Not used (spare)
Ignition switch
Radio
Front parking lamps
Brake on/off – Instrument panel,
Engine

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
32

Fuse amp
rating
15A

33
34

10A
10A

35
36

5A
10A

37
38

10A
10A

39
40
41

15A
10A
7.5A

42
43
44
45
46
47

5A
10A
10A
5A
10A
15A

48

30A Circuit
Breaker
Relay

49

317
Protected components

Delay/accessory – moonroof,
power windows, locks, Automatic
dimming mirror/Compass, Trailer
tow power telescope mirrors
Rear heated seats
Reverse sensing system, 4x4
switch, Rear video, Off road
indicator (SVT Raptor), Front
video (SVT Raptor), Camera
splice module (SVT Raptor)
Hill descent switch (SVT Raptor)
Restraint control module,
Occupant classification system
module
Trailer brake control
Delayed accessory – 110 volt
power point, Radio
High beam headlamps
Rear park lamps
Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator, Upfitter switch
(SVT Raptor)
Overdrive cancel switch
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Climate controls module
Fog lamps, Exterior mirror turn
signals
Power windows, Power sliding
back window
Delayed accessory

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

318

Fuses

Auxiliary relay box (SVT Raptor only)

2

4

6

1

3

5

The relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine
compartment.
Fuse/Relay Fuse amp
location
rating
1
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—

Description
Upfitter 1 relay
Upfitter 2 relay
Upfitter 3 relay
Upfitter 4 relay
Front camera washer relay
Not used

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

319

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Turn off the power running boards, if equipped,
before working under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise.
We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer
can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

320

Maintenance

Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to positionP.
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located on the front bumper under the grill.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

321

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
3.7L V6 Engine

A

B

C

H

G

A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Battery
C. Engine oil dipstick (out of view)
D. Brake fluid reservoir
E. Engine coolant reservoir
F. Air filter assembly
G. Engine oil filler cap (out of view)
H. Power distribution box

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

D

E

F

322

Maintenance

5.0L V8 Engine

A

B

C

D

H
A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Battery
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Engine oil dipstick
E. Brake fluid reservoir
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Air filter assembly
H. Power distribution box

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

E

F

G

Maintenance

323

6.2L V8 Engine

A

I

B

C

H

G

A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Engine oil dipstick
C. Brake fluid reservoir
D. Engine coolant reservoir
E. Air filter assembly
F. Power steering fluid reservoir
G. Power distribution box
H. Engine oil filler cap
I. Battery

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

F

D

E

324

Maintenance

3.5L V6 EcoBoost® Engine

A

B

C

H
A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Battery
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Engine oil dipstick
E. Brake fluid reservoir
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Air filter assembly
H. Power distribution box

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

D

E

F

G

Maintenance

325

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A. MIN
B. MAX

A

B

ENGINE OIL CHECK
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick. See the
Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN
and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil
to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

326

Maintenance

Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine
and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil
that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for
more information. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Information.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty,
add coolant immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%,
which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

327

Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants or additives,
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system components and may void the
warranty.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

328

Maintenance

• In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification.
See Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle.
If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease
the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

329

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and
terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will
completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

330

Maintenance

When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of collision and injury, be
prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may
not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures
reduce.
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer, but because of the added
load, the vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures
during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep
grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

331

At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge
needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
TEMP message may appear in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s speed caused by reduced
engine power. Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if
certain high temperature/high load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine’s fluid temperatures. The amount of speed reduction
will depend on the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient temperature,
and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If you notice any of the following:
• the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot)
area
• the coolant temperature warning light illuminates
• the service engine soon indicator illuminates
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant
level.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may restart your engine and
continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, restart the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer. See Adding engine coolant in this
chapter for more information.
Refer to fail-safe cooling for additional information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

332

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer.
If required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips
or shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

N

DR

FI

LL

AI

3. Add only enough fluid
through the filler opening so
that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Capacities
and Specifications section.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

333

BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating
range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the
normal operating range, the performance of the system could be
compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK (6.2L V8 ENGINE ONLY)
Check the power steering fluid at the proper intervals. Refer to
Scheduled Maintenance Information.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines.
Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Capacities and
Specifications for the proper fluid type.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

334

Maintenance

CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Note: Wash hands after
handling.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

335

If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 kilometers) or more
to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol
content for flexible fuel vehicles.
• For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content
have been relearned.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

336

Maintenance

R
TU

LE
AD

RE

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the
clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
N

RECYCLE

Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The battery management system (BMS) monitors battery conditions
and takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is
detected, the system may temporarily disable certain electrical features
to protect the battery. Those electrical accessories affected include the
rear defrost, heated/cooled seats, climate control fan, heated steering
wheel, audio and navigation system. A message may be shown in the
information displays to alert the driver that battery protection actions
are active. These messages are only for notification that an action is
taking place, and not intended to indicate an electrical problem or that
the battery requires replacement.
Electrical accessory installation
To ensure proper operation of the BMS, any electrical devices that are
added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made
directly at the negative battery post. A connection at the negative
battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories added to the vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and
durability, and may also affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be
replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery which matches
the electrical requirements of the vehicle. After battery replacement,
or in some cases after charging the battery with the external charger,
the BMS requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time (key off with doors
closed) to relearn the new battery state of charge. Prior to relearning the
state of charge, the BMS may disable electrical features (to protect the
battery) earlier than normal.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

337

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

A
B

1. To remove the wiper blade, pull
the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Pry open the lock cover (A)
with your thumb to release the
blade.

C
2. Press the retaining clip to
disengage the wiper blade, then pull
the wiper blade down (C) toward
the windshield to remove it from
the arm.
3. To install the new wiper blade,
insert the wiper blade into the
wiper arm hook (B).

4. While holding the wiper arm, push the wiper blade up and away from
the windshield.
5. Close the lock cover.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

338

Maintenance

Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Cleaning the windows and wiper blades in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers.
The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge
of the wiper rubber element.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft® Part Numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
For EcoBoostequipped vehicles: When servicing the air cleaner, it is
important that no foreign material enter the air induction system.
The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even
small particles.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

339

Changing the Air Filter Element (3.7L, 5.0L, and 6.2L Engines)
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air
outlet tube. This connector will
need to be unplugged.

2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the
air outlet tube.

3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

340

Maintenance
5. Release the three clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the center of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.

6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.

8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air
filter housing and tighten the
air-tube clamp bolt snugly, but do
not overtighten it.
10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

341

Changing the Air Filter Element (3.5L EcoBoost Engine)
1. Locate the sensor electrical connector on
1 2
the air outlet tube (1). This connector will
need to be unplugged.
2. Pull up to disconnect wiring harness (2).
3. Disconnect the sensor by pressing the
retaining tab and pulling back on the lead.

4. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system, and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
5. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
6. Release the clamps that secure the
cover to the air filter housing. Push the
air filter cover toward the center of the
vehicle and up slightly to release it.
7. Remove the air filter element from
the air filter housing.
8. Install a new air filter element.
9. Replace the air filter housing cover
and secure the clamps. Be careful not to
crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing and cover and ensure that the tabs on the edge are
properly aligned into the slots.
10. Slip the air tube onto the air filter housing and tighten the air-tube
clamp bolt snugly, but do not overtighten it.
11. Reconnect the sensor electrical connector to the outlet tube.
12. Push the wiring harness back in place.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

342

Maintenance

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
A
• (B) Center height of lamp to
ground
D
• (C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (D) Horizontal reference line

C

B

2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp (indicated by
a 3.0 millimeter circle on the lens) to the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at
this height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
For Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps:
On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards
the right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam
will need to be adjusted so the
edge is at the same height as the
horizontal reference line.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

343

For Vehicles With HID Headlamps:
There is a distinct cut-off (change
from light to dark) in the left
portion of the beam pattern. The
top edge of this cut-off should be
positioned 2 inches (5 centimeters)
below the horizontal reference line.

4. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise or
clockwise in order to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp.
5. Repeat Steps 3–4 for the other
headlamp.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NOT ADJUSTABLE.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

344

Maintenance

These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Halogen Headlamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the pushpin that holds
the air deflector/protective cover to
the upper inboard corner of the
lamp.

3. Loosen the three retaining bolts
(two at top of lamp, one at lower
inboard corner).

4. Once the three retaining bolts have been removed, slide the headlamp
assembly forward, disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

345

6. Remove the bulb and socket by
turning it counterclockwise, then
pull it straight out.

WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”
source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned
out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your
authorized dealer.
Replacing Front Parking Lamp, Turn Signal, and Side Marker Bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the pushpin that holds
the air deflector/protective cover
from the upper inboard corner of
the lamp.
3. Loosen the three retaining bolts
(two at top of lamp, one at lower
inboard corner).
4. Once the three retaining bolts
have been removed, slide the
headlamp assembly forward,
disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

346

Maintenance
5. Remove the bulb and socket by
turning it counterclockwise, then
pull it straight out.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.

Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing Tail, Brake, Turn signal, and Backup Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assembly and remove the two
bolts from the tail lamp assembly.

3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly
straight rearward from the tailgate
pillar to disengage two hidden
snap-in retainers.
4. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and press in the new bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Maintenance

347

Replacing High-Mount Brake and Cargo Lamp Bulbs
Make sure the headlamp control is
in the off position.
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
vehicle to expose the bulb sockets.
2. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise and
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
fog lamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

348

Maintenance

Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully
pull to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Headlamps, halogen, high
beam/low beam (if equipped)
Headlamps, high intensity
discharge (HID) (if equipped)
Front park/turn lamps
Front side marker
Fog lamps
Backup lamp

Number of
bulbs
2

Trade number

2

D3S

2

3157NAK LCP
(natural amber)
168
9140
921

2
2
2

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

H13/9008

Maintenance
Function

Number of
bulbs
4

349
Trade number

Rear stop/turn/side marker/tail
3057K LCP
lamp
High-mount brake lamp
1
912
Front row map lamps
2
W5W
Rear dome lamp
1
578
Rear dome/courtesy lamps
3
578
High mount cargo box lamps
2
912
License plate lamp
2
194
Exterior mounted mirror turn
2
See your dealer
signal indicator (if equipped)
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
2
See your dealer
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

350

Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

351

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft, terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface;
if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as
soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, use Motorcraft Detail
Wash (ZC-3-A), and, as required, Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), both as per the directions on the products’ labels. To manually
dry, use a clean, dry, lint-free towel. Do not use rubber, plastic and vinyl
protectant products on the running board surface, as the area may
become slippery.
Exterior Chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials, such as steel wool or plastic pads, as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Rear suspension components may require regular cleaning with a power
washer or a thorough rinse with a strong stream of water if the vehicle is
operated in dusty or muddy environments. Rear leaf springs or other
suspension components may emit squeak or popping noises while operating
the vehicle if particles, such as dirt, rocks, or other debris, are present in the
components.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

352

Vehicle Care

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will grey or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles, such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout, before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft®
Engine Shampoo.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

353

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to
replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage
to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

354

Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area
first with Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

355

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white,
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact
with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan lotion, in order
to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area;
allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

356

Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Door Panels and Console (FX appearance
package)
Your vehicle’s instrument panel, door panels and console are uniquely
painted with both high and low gloss paints that require special care.
The high gloss area is similar to that of the vehicle’s exterior; the low
gloss area is designed to help protect the driver from undesirable
windshield reflection.
High gloss paint area
In order to maintain the finish, the high gloss areas should be treated
similar to the that of exterior paint or glossy plastic surfaces. When
cleaning the high gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon® (PTFE)-based products.
Dust the high gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
For general cleaning, use mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then
dry with a clean, dry cloth.
For removal of fine scuffs and scratches, use Scotch-Brite® Microfiber Cloth
or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A),
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45), or Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish
(ZC-8-A). Note: Removal of deep scuffs and scratches should be performed
by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair facility.
Low gloss paint area
The low gloss area of the instrument panel’s upper dash should be
cleaned with mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then dried with a
clean, dry cloth. When cleaning the low gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon® (PTFE)-based products.
• Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants.
Dust the low gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

357

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH® EDITION)
Note: For the King Ranch® Edition leather seats, refer to a separate
section in this chapter.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED WITH THE KING RANCH® EDITION)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

358

Vehicle Care

Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch® Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch® Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch® Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior.
If a film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt
and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

359

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long-term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate hood latch, all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

360

Vehicle Care

Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

361

Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

362

Wheels and Tires

GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Owners About High Performance Tires
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with high performance tires. When first
driving the vehicle after it has been parked for a period of time, you may
experience a temporary ride disturbance. This is a characteristic of the
tires and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct
itself within 5-15 miles (8-25 kilometers) of driving. If the disturbance
persists, have the tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts. Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Utility vehicles, vans and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles, vans and
trucks are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

363

Four-Wheel Drive System (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of
four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low-traction
situations, it will not stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive (when selected) has the ability
to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different drive
modes as necessary. You can find information on transfer case operation
and shifting procedures in the Transmission chapter. You can find
information on transfer case maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive
to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary
clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front
drivetrain comes up to speed and are not cause for concern.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

364

Wheels and Tires

How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks can differ from some other
vehicles in a few noticeable ways.
Your vehicle may be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it to
travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over
the crest of a hill without getting
hung up or damaging underbody
components. All other things held
equal, a shorter wheelbase may
make your vehicle quicker to
respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles,
vans and trucks often will have a
higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

365

TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire
Quality Grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
11⁄2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

366

Wheels and Tires

Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each
tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant,
tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

367

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load-carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load-carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been
stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to
the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

368

Wheels and Tires

Information on P Type Tires

C D
B

E

F

G
H

A

I

P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)

J

M

L

K

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization
or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

369

G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 (130)
N
87 (140)
Q
99 (159)
R
106 (171)
S
112 (180)
T
118 (190)
U
124 (200)
H
130 (210)
V
149 (240)
W
168 (270)
Y
186 (299 )
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers
represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits.
For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between
are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

370

Wheels and Tires

J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can
be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load or radial tubeless.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

371

Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
B
information beyond those of P type
C
tires. These differences are
A
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
D
inflation limits.
B
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single,
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

372

Wheels and Tires

Information on T Type Tires

B
A

C

D
E

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of
P type tires. These differences
are described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.

A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

373

INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

374

Wheels and Tires

Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s maximum
permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be
carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s
recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never
be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for
example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

375

Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire
and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see Dissimilar Spare
Tire and Wheel Assembly Information under Changing a Road Wheel
in this chapter. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help prevent
your vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look
like narrow strips of smooth rubber
across the tread will appear on the
tire when the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

376

Wheels and Tires

Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected,
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load,
speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

377

Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

378

Wheels and Tires

Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may
be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

379

Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system, then the settings for the system sensors
need to be updated. Always perform the system reset procedure after
tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure in
this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as
a spare tire and wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from
the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel
assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used
in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, check tire pressure and adjust to
the recommended inflation pressure.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

380

Wheels and Tires
• Rear-wheel drive vehicles/
Four-wheel drive vehicles
(front tires at left of diagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Note: Do not place chains on the following tires sizes: P265/60R18,
P275/65R18, LT275/65R18, LT315/70R17, P275/55R20, and P275/45R22.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

381

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

382

Wheels and Tires

telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem.
The pressure sensor is covered by
the tire and is not visible unless the
tire is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate
tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the tire pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an
issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel or tire needs to be
repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel or tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
For additional information, see Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in this section.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

383

When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for
information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Solid warning
light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Tire(s)
under-inflated

1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire Label
(located on the edge of driver’s door
or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be
driven for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this section.
Tire pressure
If the tires are properly inflated and
monitoring
the spare tire is not in use but the
system
light remains on, contact your
malfunction
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
On vehicles with different front and
without sensor
rear tire pressures, the system must
training
be retrained following every tire
rotation. See Tire rotation in this
chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

384

Wheels and Tires

Low tire
Possible cause Customer action required
pressure
warning light
Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
light
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this section.
Tire pressure
If the tires are properly inflated and
monitoring
the spare tire is not in use but the
system
light remains on, contact your
malfunction
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to
28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight
with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light
is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires.
If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

385

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Load
Carrying for more information.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure needs to be
performed after each tire rotation on vehicles that require different
recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear
tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these
vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at
two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the
system reset procedure should be performed at least three feet (one
meter) away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing
the system reset procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor
or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be
repeated on all four wheels.
• A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

386

Wheels and Tires

Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes
and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires
and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. This must be
accomplished within 10 seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the system indicator will flash and a message is shown in the
information display (if equipped). If this does not occur, please try again
starting at Step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message is shown in
the information display (if equipped), seek service from your authorized
dealer.
5. Note: Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires
using the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire
in the following clockwise order:
• Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
• Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
• Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
• Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

387

Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the system indicator stops flashing, and a
message is shown in the information display (if equipped).
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Load Carrying for more
information.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system and should not be used. However, if
you must use a sealant, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford
dealer.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitoring
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in
this chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

388

Wheels and Tires

Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire
has a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
• tow a trailer.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire.
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

389

• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• towing a trailer.
• driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
• driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

390

Wheels and Tires

Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission selector lever is in
position P.
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission selector lever in
position P, set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
WARNING: Disable the power running boards before jacking,
lifting, or placing any object under the vehicle. Never place your
hand between the power running board and the vehicle as extended
power running boards will retract when the doors are closed. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

391

Park on a level surface, activate the hazard flashers and set the parking
brake. Then, place the transmission selector lever in position P and turn
the engine off.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper. The jack, jack handle and lug wrench are located in the
following locations:
Body Style
Regular Cab

SuperCab
SuperCrew

Location
Attached to a floor bracket behind or under the
driver’s seat (for easier access move the driver seat
forward)
Attached to a floor bracket under the rear seat on
the driver’s side
In a plastic box in the floor under the rear seat

To remove the jack on Regular Cab and SuperCab models:
Remove the wing nut and turn the jack screw counterclockwise to
release pressure before removing the jack from the bracket.
To remove the jack on SuperCrew models:
1. Lift both rear seat cushions.
2. Remove the insert containing the Easy Fuel® funnel from the driver’s
side.
3. Remove the two small wing nuts on the passenger side.
4. Slide the plastic box toward the driver’s side and remove.
See the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire change
instructions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

392

Wheels and Tires

Removing the spare tire
1. Use the ignition key to remove
the lock cylinder from the access
hole of the bumper to allow access
to the guide tube. Assemble the
jack handle as shown in the
illustration.

2. Fully insert the jack handle
through the bumper hole and into
the guide tube through the access
hole in the rear bumper.

3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground,
the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack.
4. Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel.
5. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.

• Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations. Note: The
F-150 SVT Raptor also includes a chock, saddle extension and wing bolt.
• Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim that is
blocking the lug nuts.
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
Note: For the F-150 SVT Raptor, install the saddle extension on the jack
as shown in the jack usage and storage instructions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

393

7. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
• Front

Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking location point, NOT the control arm.
Note: For the F-150 SVT Raptor, you must always use the jack saddle
extension.
• Rear

Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

394

Wheels and Tires

8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown.
See Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications later in this chapter for the
proper lug nut torque specification:
• Six lug nut wheel
1
4

3

6
5

2

• Seven lug nut wheel

1
3
6
5
4
7

2

12. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat/spare tire.
13. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
14. Unblock the wheels.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

395

Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with
the spare tire lock key and jack handle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

396

Wheels and Tires

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles
(160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as rotation, flat tire,
wheel removal ).
Bolt size

Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb
N•m
M14 x 2.0
150
200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
and mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Capacities and Specifications

397

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine

3.7L V6
Engine

5.0L V8
Engine

6.2L V8
Engine

3.5L V6
EcoBoost
Engine

Cubic
inches

226

302

378

214

Fuel

Minimum
87 octane
or E85

Minimum
87 octane
or E85

Minimum
87 octane

Minimum
87 octane

Firing
1-4-2-5-3-6 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
order
Ignition
Coil on plug Coil on plug
Coil on plug
system
Spark plug .049-.053 in. .049-.053 in.
.041-.047 in.
gap
1.25-1.35 mm 1.25-1.35 mm 1.04-1.20 mm
Compression
10.5:1
10.5:1
9.8:1
ratio
Engine Drivebelt Routing
3.7L engine

5.0L engine

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
.030-.033 in.
.75-.85 mm
10.0:1

398

Capacities and Specifications
6.2L engine

3.5L EcoBoost engine

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

6.2L engine oil1,2

5.0L engine oil1,2

3.7L engine oil1,2

Brake fluid

Item

Capacity

Ford part name or
equivalent
Between
Motorcraft® High
MIN/MAX on
Performance DOT 3
brake fluid
Motor Vehicle
reservoir
Brake Fluid
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Premium
6.0 quarts (5.7L) Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil (US)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Full Synthetic
7.7 quarts (7.3L) Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil (Canada)
7.0 quarts (6.6L) •Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Synthetic Motor
Oil (Canada)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

•XO-5W20–QSP (US)
•XO-5W-20 QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W-20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945–A

PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1

Ford part number /
Ford specification

Capacities and Specifications

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

399

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)
Front axle (4X4)

3.5L EcoBoost
engine coolant3

6.2L engine coolant3

5.0L engine coolant3

3.5 pints (1.8L)

16.0 quarts
(15.1L)
17.0 quarts
(16.1L)
19.5 quarts
(18.5L)
16.5 quarts
(15.6L)

6.0 quarts
(5.7L)

3.5L EcoBoost
engine oil1,2

3.7L engine coolant3

Capacity

Item

Motorcraft® SAE
80W-90 Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant

Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted

Ford part name or
equivalent
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Full Synthetic
Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Super Premium
Motor Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Synthetic Motor
Oil (Canada)

XY-80W-90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A

•VC-3DIL-B (US)
•CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2

•XO-5W30-QSP (US)
•XO-5W30-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W30-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W30-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C946-A

Ford part number /
Ford specification

400
Capacities and Specifications

Fill to between
MIN and MAX
lines on reservoir
1.5 quarts (1.4L)
1.5 quarts (1.4L)

Transfer case fluid
(4X4 ESOF)6
Transfer case fluid
(torque on demand)

Motorcraft®
MERCON® V
ATF
Motorcraft® Transfer
Case Fluid
Motorcraft®
MERCON® LV
ATF

XT-10-QLV /
MERCON® LV

XL-12 /
—

XT-5-QM /
MERCON® V

XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B

Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)

—

Power steering fluid
(6.2L engine only)

XG-1-C /
ESA-M1C75-B

XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A

Ford part number /
Ford specification

Premium Long-Life
Grease

Ford part name or
equivalent
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-140 Rear Synthetic
Axle Lubricant

—

5.5 pints (2.6L)

Rear axle fluid4,5
Transmission
/steering/parking brake
linkages and pivots,
brake pedal shaft
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, seat tracks, fuel
filler door hinge and
door check arm

Capacity

Item

Capacities and Specifications

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

401

Motorcraft®
MERCON® LV
ATF

12.1 quarts
(11.7L)
(3.7L engine)
13.1 quarts
(12.4L)
(5.0L engine)
13.1 quarts
(12.4L)
(6.2L engine)
13.1 quarts
(12.4L)
(3.5L EcoBoost
engine)

Fill as required

26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional

Automatic transmission
fluid (6R80) 7,8

Windshield washer fluid

Fuel tank
Reg. Cab 6.5’ box /
SuperCab 5.5’ box

XT-10-QLV /
MERCON® LV

Ford part number /
Ford specification

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)
—

—

Motorcraft® Premium
Windshield Washer
ZC-32-A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
Concentrate (US)
(Canada) /
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
WSB-M8B16-A2/- (Canada)

Ford part name or
equivalent

Capacity

Item

402
Capacities and Specifications

26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional
26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional
26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional

Capacity

—

—

—

Ford part name or
equivalent

—

—

—

Ford part number /
Ford specification

1
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C946-A, SAE 5W-30 (3.5L EcoBoost engine), or
WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 (3.7L, 5.0L, and 6.2L engines), and display the API Certification Mark.
2
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine. Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and
increased emission levels.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to 1/4-9/16 inch (6-14 mm) below the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A, for complete fill of 8.8 inch Traction-Lok axles.

Fuel tank
Reg. Cab 8’ box /
SuperCab 6.5’ box /
SuperCab 8’ box

Fuel tank SuperCrew
6.5’ box

Fuel tank SuperCrew
5.5’ box

Item

Capacities and Specifications

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

403

5
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service
is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be
changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
6
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
7
Approximate dry fill capacity including transmission fluid cooling system, actual refill capacities
will vary based on vehicle application and transmission fluid cooling system (i.e. coolers size,
cooling lines, auxiliary cooler capacities). The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should
be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
8
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV should only use MERCON® LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.

404
Capacities and Specifications

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Capacities and Specifications

405

MOTORCRAFT® PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter
element
Battery
Oil Filter
Spark plugs
Windshield
wiper blade

3.7L V6
engine

5.0L V8
engine

6.2L V8
engine

3.5L V6
EcoBoost
engine

FA-1883

FA-1883

FA-1883

FA-1883

BXT-65-750
FL-500-S

BXT-65-750
FL-500-S

BXT-65-750
FL-820-S

BXT-65-750
FL-500

1

1

1

1

WW-2201-PF

1

For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent
replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage
to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

406

Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
is located on the driver’s side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Capacities and Specifications

407

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the
driver’s seating position.

TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.

Description
Six-speed automatic (6R80)

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Code
6

408

Accessories

ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12000 miles (20000 kilometers) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Bug shields
•Chrome exhaust tips
•Deflectors
•Front grilles

•Running boards
•Step bars
•Custom graphics*
•Splash guards

Interior style
•Ambient lighting
•Floor mats
•Electrochromatic compass/
temperature interior mirrors
•DVD Entertainment systems

•Power sliding rear window
•Leather-trimmed interior seating*

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Accessories

409

Lifestyle
•Ash cup / smoker’s package
•Racks and carriers*
•Bedliners and bedmats
•Truck bed camping tent*
•Bed side step
•Sportliner cargo liner*
•Towing mirrors
•Rear seat entertainment*
•Bed extender
•Trailer brake controller
•Tonneau covers*
•Hitch balls and towbars
•Interior cargo organization and management
•Truck bed cargo organization and management
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
•Keyless entry keypad
•Remote start
•Vehicle security systems
•Wheel locks
•Bed step*
•Bed hooks*
•Protective seat covers*
•Back up alarm*
•Cable lock*
•Tool/cargo boxes*
•Locking gas plug for capless
•Vehicle cover
fuel system
•Bumper and hitch mounted parking sensors*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

410

Accessories

For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
• Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan

411

FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS
WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)
More than 32 Million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind protection
beyond the expiration of the New Vehicle Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP can quickly pay for itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Coverage for up to 500+ covered components
There are four, Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage.
Ask your dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE – Covers 113 components, and includes many high tech
items
3. BaseCARE – Covers 84 components
4. PowertrainCARE – Covers 29 critical components
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the United
States and Canada. It is the only Extended Service Plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go
• Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using Genuine Ford
and Lincoln parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit – You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at the dealership for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits – If your vehicle is kept overnight for
covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including
Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs, or Field Service Actions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

412

Ford Extended Service Plan

Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance
• Travel Expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner.
Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher
degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford
ESP, thereby improving resale value!
Avoid the Rising cost of vehicle maintenance
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items that routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventative care and replacement items that require periodic attention
for normal wear:
• Windshield Wiper Blades
• Spark Plugs (except in California)
• The clutch Disc
• Brake pads and linings
• Shock Absorbers
• Belts and Hoses
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment
Contact your selling dealership today so they can customize a Genuine
Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan

413

Interest Free Financing Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
PO Box 8072
Royal Oak Michigan 48068-0039
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800-367-3377. Don’t
forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all
the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time.
You are pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles!
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending
on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your
own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada and the United States,
provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers.
The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized
Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

414

Scheduled Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft® and Ford-authorized branded
remanufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry
a nationwide, 12 month/12000 mile (20000 kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts, they may not
meet Ford specifications and, depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

415

Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of
your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is imperative that scheduled
maintenance be completed at the designated intervals.
Vehicles with a 3.5L, 3.7L or 5.0L engine, are equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor (IOLM) system which shows a message in the
information display at the proper oil change service interval. This interval
may be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers). When ENGINE
OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information
display, it’s time for an oil change; the oil change must be done within two
weeks or 500 miles (800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor must be reset after each oil change. See the Information Displays
chapter.
If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative,
you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles
(8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals.
Vehicles with a 6.2L engine, do not have an IOLM system. See the
7500 mile (12000 kilometers) maintenance schedule for oil change
service intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

416

Scheduled Maintenance

Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
this book and in the Workshop Manual. Additional chemicals or
additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as
part of normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

417

Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Hazard warning system operation
Horn operation
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation
Steering and linkage
Tires (including spare) for wear and
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
proper pressure**
For oil and fluid leaks
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots
Washer spray and wiper operation
Accessory drive belt(s)
Battery performance
Engine air filter
Exhaust system

*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power
steering (if equipped) and window washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

418

Scheduled Maintenance

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

419

NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Vehicles Equipped with a 3.5L, 3.7L or 5.0L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines
when the engine oil should be changed based on how your vehicle is used.
By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps
reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time. This means you do not have to remember to change the oil
on a mileage-based schedule; the vehicle lets you know when an oil change
is due by displaying OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display.
The following table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and its
impact on engine oil change intervals; it is provided as a guideline only.
Actual engine oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally
decrease with severity of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Miles (km)
Vehicle use and examples
Normal
– Normal commuting with highway driving
7500-10000
– No, or moderate, load or towing
(12000-16000)
– Flat to moderately hilly roads
– No extended idling
Severe
– Moderate to heavy load or towing
5000-7499
– Mountainous or off-road conditions
(8000-11999)
– Extended idling
– Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999
– Maximum load or towing
(4000-7999)
– Extreme hot or cold operation

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

420

Scheduled Maintenance

Normal scheduled maintenance*
At every oil change
Change engine oil and filter.**
interval as indicated by Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
the information display tread depth.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level
(if equipped with dipstick). Consult dealer for
requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped).
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*

Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between
service intervals.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
At 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)

421

Other maintenance items1
Replace climate-controlled (heated and
cooled) seat filter (if equipped).
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine coolant.2
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).3
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive
vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive
vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).

1

These maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the last oil change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers),
then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

422

Scheduled Maintenance

Vehicles Equipped with a 6.2L Engine
The following section contains the Normal Scheduled Maintenance.
This schedule is presented at specific mileage (kilometer) intervals with
exceptions as noted.
Normal scheduled maintenance
Every 7500 miles
Change engine oil and filter.
(12000 km) or six
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
months (whichever
tread depth.*
comes first)
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Every 15000 miles
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level.
(24000 km) or
Consult dealer for requirements.
12 months (whichever Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
comes first)
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings (Four-wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped).
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
*

The SVT Raptor has a specific tire rotation interval. See the supplement
for more information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Every 97500 miles
(156000 km)
Every 105000 miles
(168000 km)
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)

423

Other maintenance items
Replace climate-controlled (heated and
cooled) seat filter (if equipped).
Replace engine air filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Change engine coolant.*
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).**
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive
vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive
vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).

*

Initial replacement at six years or 105000 miles (168000 kilometers),
then every three years or 45000 miles (72000 kilometers).
**
If not replaced, inspect every 15000 miles (24000 kilometers).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

424

Scheduled Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

425

426

Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

Scheduled Maintenance

427

SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS – 3.5L, 3.7L and 5.0L ENGINES
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or
within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
message appearing in the information display.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers); perform the 30000 mile (48000 kilometer)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers); perform the
engine air filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers].)
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display and perform services listed in
the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently,
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
service as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in heavy
commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display and perform services listed in
the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently,
Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 60000 miles
Replace spark plugs.
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

428

Scheduled Maintenance

Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty
roads
Inspect frequently,
Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 5000 miles
Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.*
(8000 km) or six
months
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Inspect frequently,
service as required

Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months

Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)

Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.*
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used (2WD
vehicles).
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).

Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

429

SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS – 6.2L ENGINE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
Inspect frequently,
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
service as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 5000 miles
Inspect wheels and related components for
(8000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.*
(8000 km) or six
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
months
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
*
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in heavy
commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Inspect frequently,
Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 5000 miles
Inspect brake system.
(8000 km)
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.*
(8000 km) or six
months
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
Replace spark plugs.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

430

Scheduled Maintenance

*

Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or
dusty roads
Inspect frequently,
Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 5000 miles
Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.*
(8000 km) or six
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
months
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
*

Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Inspect frequently,
service as required

Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)

Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)

Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.*
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).

*

Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

431

432

Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

Scheduled Maintenance

433

EXCEPTIONS
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off units
with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with Ford-design axles
are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid unless a leak is
suspected, service is required or the assembly has been submerged in water.
During long periods of trailer towing with outside temperatures above 70°F
(21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long periods above 45 mph (72 km/h),
non-synthetic rear axle fluids should be changed every 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) or three months, whichever comes first. This interval can
be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add
friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100000 miles (160000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
service interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter replacement: Engine air filter life is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

434

Scheduled Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
3.5L, 3.7L and 5.0L engines
Six years or 100000 miles (160000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles (80000 km)
Initial change

Initial change
After initial change

6.2L engine
Six years or 105000 miles (168000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Every three years or 45000 miles (72000 km)

Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

SYNC®

435

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped).
• Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition system.
• USB device charging (if your device supports this).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

436

SYNC®

GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
• Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

437

When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so
they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s manual for further
information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and
retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a
short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access
to the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada
do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with
lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health
Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

438

SYNC®

USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands.
This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say:

If you want to:

“Phone”
“USB”

Make calls.
Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio”
Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in”
Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel”
Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC”
Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings”
Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.*
“Services”
Access the SYNC Services portal.*
“Mobile apps”
Access mobile applications.*
“Help”
Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*

If equipped, U.S. only.

System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

439

Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say:
“Interaction mode standard”
“Interaction mode advanced”

The system:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to
your request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that correct?”)
If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested
and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

440

SYNC®

Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

441

Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 2000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
3. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system may
prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the
primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first
upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

442

SYNC®

Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:

“PHONE”
“Call ”1,2
“Call  on mobile OR cell”1,2
“Call  on other”1,2
“Phone book  at home”2
“Phone book  on mobile OR cell”2
“Call history outgoing”2
“Phone book  on Other”2
“Call history missed”2
“Menu”2,3
“Join”
“Call  at home”1,2
“Call  at work” OR “Call  in office”1,2
“Dial”1,4
“Phone book ”2
“Phone book  at work” OR “Phone book  at office”2
“Call history incoming”2
“Connections”2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1

These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
These commands are not available until phone information is completely
downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below.
4
See “DIAL” table below.
2

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

443

“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”*
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”
*
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.

Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC® to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one)
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” (pound)
“ 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

444

SYNC®

Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call ” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow
button. To erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left
arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select:
Mute Call?
Privacy

Call Hold

You can:
Mute the call.
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a
more private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears.
(The display indicates In Privacy and the
system transfers your call.)
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears.
To answer another call at this time, press the
phone button.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Join Calls

Enter Tones

Phonebook

Call History

Return

445

You can:
Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC
or use voice commands to place the second
call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press
OK. Press OK again when Join Calls? appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty/conference call.
Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your call history options (incoming, outgoing
or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the
selection.
Exit the current menu.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

446

SYNC®

Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select:
Phone Redial

Call History1

Phonebook1,2

You can:
Redial the last number called (if available).
Press OK to select, then press OK again to
confirm.
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,
Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed.
Press OK make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC
(if the auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports
this feature).
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears,
then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Text Message1
Phone Settings1

SYNC Services3

911 Assist4

Vehicle Health
Report3
Mobile Apps3
System Settings

Exit Phone Menu

447

You can:
Enables you to send, download and delete
text messages.
Allows you to view your phone’s status, set
ring tones, select your message notification,
change phone book entries and automatically
download your cellular phone among other
features.
Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for
you after an accident (if the feature is used
properly).
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on
your vehicle.
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smartphone.
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings
(add, connect, set as primary, on/off, delete)
as well as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.

1

This is a phone-dependent feature.

2

This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.

3

If equipped, United States only.

4

If equipped, United States and Canada only.

Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

448

SYNC®

Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
• Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send.
• Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose
Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select.
The display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted
and SYNC returns you to the text message menu.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

449

Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?:
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system
now needs to know who to send the message to.
4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each
text message is sent with the following signature: “This message was
sent from my ”.
Pre-defined text message options
Can’t talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
I need more directions
I love you
Too funny
Can’t wait to see you
I’m stuck in traffic

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

450

SYNC®

Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select:
Phone Status

You can:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an
Set Ringer
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Modify Phonebook

Auto Download

Return

451

You can:
Modify the contents of your phone book
(i.e., add, delete, download). Press OK to
select and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded
each time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Exit the current menu.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

452

SYNC®

System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select:
Add Bluetooth
Device*
Connect Bluetooth
Device

Set Primary Phone

You can:
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

453

If you select:
You can:
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired phone.
Delete Device
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all
Delete All Devices
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.
Return
*

This is a speed-dependent feature.

Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

454
If you select:
Prompts

Languages

Factory Defaults

Master Reset

SYNC®
You can:
Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Choose between English, Espanol and
Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that
the system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings.
This selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages
and paired devices) and return to the factory
default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates
when complete and SYNC takes you back to
the Advanced menu.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
If you select:
Install Application

System Info

MAP Profile

Return

455

You can:
Install applications you have downloaded.
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to
confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as
the FPN number.
Press OK to select.
This is a Bluetooth component which can
further help your phone with the exchange of
text messages.
Exit the current menu.

SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services (if equipped, United States only): Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock
prices and more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, United States only): Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

456

SYNC®

WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
For more information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display.
Set On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder.
Off with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

457

To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the
United States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the
call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

458

SYNC®

911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

459

The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
To run a report using the phone button:
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report options
User Preferences:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
Press OK to select
or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
and enter the menu. prompt you to run a health report at certain
Scroll to select from: mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
Run Report?
Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

460

SYNC®

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and diagnostic
information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health
Report may also collect additional vehicle information. Ford may use the
vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not run the feature
or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com.
See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions,
and Privacy Statement - for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Using SYNC
with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors,
changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

461

Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal.
5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service, such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
6. To return to the Services menu, say “Services” or for help, say
“Help”.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

462

SYNC®

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business search”.
To find the closest business or type of business to your current location,
just say “Business search” and then “Search near me”. If you need
further assistance in finding a location you can say “Operator” at any
time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator.
You may also be prompted to speak with an operator when the automatic
system has difficulty matching your voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections.
Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription.
For more information on Operator Assist visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and a
route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent back to
your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call is
automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual driving
instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route Status
ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

463

Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
Personalizing

Push to interrupt

Portable

SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to
interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip
(such as a sports report), wait for the
listening tone, and say your voice command.
Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number,
not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
You can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

464

SYNC®

SYNC AppLink™
Note: This feature is only available in the United States.
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order
to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone after
starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system.
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media
menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to access the SYNC phone menu on-screen.
2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications.
3. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select a
particular app.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu by
pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Select “SYNC-Media” by pressing OK.
6. Scroll until “ Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s features, such
as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press AUX button on the center console.
2. Press MENU to access the SYNC menu.
3. Select “SYNC-Media” by pressing OK.
4. Then scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications.
5. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to
select a particular app.
6. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
7. Select “SYNC-Media” by pressing OK.
8. Scroll until “ Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

465

To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such
as “Play Station Quickmix”. Say “Help” to discover available voice
commands.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over
the vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also
supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “USB”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is
complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

466

SYNC®

6. Press OK and scroll through selections of:
• Play All
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Playlists
• Tracks
• Explore USB
• Similar Music
• Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build
your desired music selection.
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “USB” then any
of the following:
“USB”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album ”1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist ”1,3
“Play genre ”1,3
“Play next folder”2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist ”1,3
“Play previous folder”2
“Play previous track”
“Play song ”1,3

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

467

“USB”
“Play track ”1,3
“Refine album ”1,3
“Refine artist ”1,3
“Refine song ”1,3
“Refine track ”1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album ”1,3
“Search artist ”1,3
“Search genre ”1,3
“Search song ”1,3
“Search track ”1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”
1
“” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any
desired group, artist, etc.
2

Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.

3

Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

468

SYNC®

Voice command guide
Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music”
The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
The system searches for a specific
Artist/Track/Album” artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
“Refine”
This allows you to make your previous
command more specific. For example, if you
asked to search and play all music by a
certain artist, you could then say “refine
album” and choose a specific album from the
list to view. If you then select Play, the system
only plays music from that specific album.
“Autoplay”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

469

Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select:
Play Menu

You can:
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply, play
all. You can also choose to Explore USB to view
the supported digital music files on your playing
device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

470
When you select:
Select Source

SYNC®
You can:
SYNC USB: Press OK to access music plugged
into your USB port. You can also plug in devices
to charge them (if supported by your device).
Once connected, the system indexes any
readable media files. (The time required to
complete this depends on the size of the media
content being indexed.) If Autoplay is on, you
can access media files randomly as they are
indexed. If turned off, indexed media is not
available until the indexing process is complete.
SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of
average size media and notifies you if the
maximum indexing file size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent
feature which allows you to stream music
playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone.
If supported by your device, you can press
SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play
music from your portable music player over the
vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device to
the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both
USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Media Settings

Mobile Apps

System Settings

Exit Media Menu

471

You can:
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and
select your Autoplay settings. Once these
selections are turned on, they remain on until
turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.
Note: Some digital media players require both
USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately. Press OK to select and then scroll to
choose from:
Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media
files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All in
the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay: Press OK to listen to music which
has already been randomly indexed during
the indexing process.
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications
on your smart phone. See SYNC AppLink
earlier in this chapter for more information.
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts, languages,
defaults, master reset, install application and
system information).
Note: See System Settings for more information.
Press OK to exit the media menu.

Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

472

SYNC®

If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select:
Play All

Artists

Albums

You can:
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time in
numerical order.
Press OK to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected,
the system lists and then play all artists and
tracks alphabetically. If there are less than
255 indexed artist, they are listed alphabetically
in flat file mode. If there are more, they are
categorized in alphabetical categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All
Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select
from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Genres

Playlists

Tracks

Explore USB

473

You can:
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select the
desired genre and press OK.
Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists your
playlists alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more than 255, they are organized into
alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.
Search for and play a specific track which
has been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more
than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them
into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port.
You can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved
are not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore
indexed media on your flash drive.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

474
When you select:
Similar Music

Return

SYNC®
You can:
Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile a
playlist for you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new
list of similar songs and begins playing. The
metadata tags must be populated for this feature
to include each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks
won’t be available in voice recognition, play
menu or similar music. However, if you place
these tracks onto your playing device in “Mass
Storage Device Mode”, they are available in
voice recognition, play menu browsing and
similar music. Unknowns are placed into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Exit the current menu.

System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

475

Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select:
Add Bluetooth
Device*

You can:
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Device
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired media device.
Delete Device
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.
Delete All Devices
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.
Return
*

This is a speed-dependent feature

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

476

SYNC®

Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select:
Prompts

Languages

Factory Defaults

You can:
Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Master Reset

Application

Return

477

You can:
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Download new software applications
(if available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port.
See the web site for more information.
Exit the current menu.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise,
see the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility,
register your account and set preferences as well as access a
customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours).
Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca
for more information.
Phone issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
Excessive
The audio control Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
background noise settings on your
during a phone
phone may be
call.
affecting SYNC
performance.
During a call, I can Possible phone
Try turning off the device,
hear the other
malfunction.
resetting the device, removing the
person but they
device’s battery, then trying again.
cannot hear me.
Issue

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

478

SYNC®
Issue

SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.

The system says
Phonebook
Downloaded but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.

Phone issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
• This is a
• Go to the website to review
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
feature, OR
• Try turning off the device,
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
malfunction.
again.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• Use the SYNCmyphone feature
available on the website.
Limitations on
• Try pushing your phonebook
your phone’s
contacts to SYNC by using the
capability.
Add Contacts feature.
• If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
• Remove any pictures or special
ring tones associated with the
missing contact.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

479

Phone issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
I am having
• This is a
• Go to the website to review
trouble connecting phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
my phone to
feature, OR
• Try turning off the device,
SYNC.
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
malfunction.
again.
• Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
• Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
• Update your device’s software
firmware.
• Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is • This is a
• Go to the website to review
not working on
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
SYNC.
feature, OR
• Try turning off the device,
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
Issue

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

480

SYNC®

USB and media issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
I am having
Possible device
• Try turning off the device,
trouble connecting malfunction.
resetting the device or removing
my device.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
• Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
• Make sure that the device does
not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not
This is a device
Make sure you are not leaving the
recognize my
limitation.
device in your vehicle during very
device when I turn
hot or cold temperatures.
on the car.
Bluetooth audio
• This is a
Make sure the device is
does not stream.
phone-dependent connected to SYNC and that you
feature, OR
have pressed play on your device.
• The device is
not connected.
SYNC does not
• Your music files • Make sure that all song details
recognize music
may not contain
are populated.
that is on my
the proper artist, • Some devices require you to
device.
song title, album
change the USB settings from
or genre
mass storage to MTP class.
information, OR
• The file may be
corrupted, OR
• The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
Issue

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®

481

Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services
(Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Issue
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
I received a text
• Your account
• This is a free feature, but you
that the Vehicle
may not be
must first register online to use it.
Health Report is
activated on the
• Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
not activated.
website, OR
• You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
I am unable to
The preferred
When you register your account,
retrieve the report dealer information you must list a preferred dealer. If
on the website, or did not load
one is already listed, try selecting
I receive a system correctly.
another dealer and logging out.
error.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
• This could be
• Update your mobile number in
submit a report.
due to your
your account on the website.
phone’s
• Make sure you have full signal
compatibility, OR strength and that your Bluetooth
• Bad signal
volume level has been turned up.
strength, OR
• Try deleting your phone and
• Your phone may performing a clean pairing.
not be activated
on the website.
I heard a
• The phone in
• This is a free feature, but you
commercial when I use is not
must first register online to use it.
tried to use
activated, OR
• Turn off ID blocker on your
Traffic, Directions • Your phone has phone as the system recognizes
and Information.
ID blocker active. you by your phone number.
• Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

482

SYNC®

Voice command issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
SYNC does not
• You may be
• Review the Phone voice
understand what I using the wrong
commands and the Media voice
am saying.
voice commands, commands at the beginning of
OR
their respective sections.
• Be aware that SYNC’s
• You may be
speaking too soon microphone is either in your rear
or at the wrong
view mirror or in the headliner
time.
just above the windshield.
• You may be
SYNC does not
• Review the media voice
understand the
using the wrong
commands at the beginning of the
name of a song or voice commands, media section.
OR
artist.
• Say the song or artist exactly as
• You may not be listed. If you say, “Play Artist
saying the name
Prince”, the system does not
exactly as it is
play music by Prince and the
saved, OR
Revolution or Prince and the
• The system may New Power Generation.
not be reading the • Make sure you are saying the
name the same
complete title, such as “California
way you are saying remix featuring Jennifer Nettles”.
it.
• If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
• Do not use special characters in
the title as the system does not
recognize them.
Issue

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

SYNC®
Issue
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.

483

Voice command issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
• You may be
• Review the phone voice
using the wrong
commands at the beginning of the
voice commands, phone section.
OR
• Make sure you are saying the
• You may not be contacts exactly as listed. For
saying the name
example, if a contact is saved as
exactly as it is
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe Wilson”.
saved, OR
• The system works better if
• Contacts in your you list full names, such as
phonebook may be “Joe Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
very short and
• Do not use special characters
similar, or they
such as 123 or ICE, as the system
may contain
does not recognize them.
special characters, • If contacts are saved in CAPS,
OR
you have to spell them. JAKE
• Your phonebook requires you to say, “Call
contacts may be
J-A-K-E”.
saved in CAPS.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

484

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

INTRODUCTION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.

A

G

B

F

E

D

C

A. Phone
B. Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation)
C. Climate
D. Settings
E. Home
F. Information
G. Entertainment
This system uses a four-corner strategy to provide quick access several
vehicle features and settings. The touchscreen provides easy interaction
with your cellular phone, multimedia, climate control and navigation
system. The corners display any active modes within those menus, such
as phone status or the climate temperature.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

485

Note: Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access
and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition
off (and no doors open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
• Making and Receiving Calls
• Quick Dial
• Phonebook
• Call History
• Text Messaging
• Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• City Center
• Map
• Edit Route Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

486

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SETTINGS

Press to select any of the following:
• Clock
• Display
• Sound
• Vehicle
• Settings
• Help
HOME
Press to access your home screen. Depending on your vehicle’s
option package and software, your screens may vary in
appearance from the descriptions in this section. Your features may also
be limited depending on your market. Check with your authorized dealer
for availability.
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
• SYNC Services
• SIRIUS Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Apps
If the icon is yellow, see Alerts in the Information section of this
chapter.
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
• AM
• FM
• SIRIUS
• CD
• USB
• BT Stereo
• SD Card
• A/V In

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

487

Using the Touch-sensitive Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger.
To get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby
control.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface
of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference
(for example, inadvertently turning on a feature other than the
one you meant to turn on).
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these
controls on your bezel:
• Power: Switch the media or climate features off and on.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing media.
• Fan: Control the speed of the climate system fan.
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the entertainment system.
• Radio preset buttons: Located below the touchscreen, you can use
these buttons to enter a radio preset in addition to using the
touchscreen.
• MEDIA: Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes.
The screen does not change, but you see the media change in the
lower left status bar.
• Hazard flasher: Switch the hazard flashers off and on.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth.
Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or
any type of solvent to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

488

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Safety information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair SYNC®. See your authorized
dealer.
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords and/or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or cables where
they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals,
seats and/or compartments, or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in the vehicle in extreme conditions as it
could cause damage to your device. Refer to your device’s user guide
for further information.
• For your safety, some SYNC® functions are speed dependent and
cannot be performed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using with
SYNC®.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your
vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is
stationary.
• Screens that are too crowded with information, such as Point of
Interest reviews and ratings, SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores, movie
times and ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as
entering a navigation destination or editing information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone
contacts or recent phone call entries).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

489

See the following chart for more specific examples:
Cellular Phone

System Functionality

Wi-Fi and Wireless
Videos, Photos and
Graphics
Text Messages

Navigation

Restricted Features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading
phonebook contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and
recent phone call entries
Editing the keypad code
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or
Active Park Assist are active
Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing video
Editing the screen’s wallpaper or adding new
wallpaper
Composing text messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination
Demo navigation route
Adding or Editing Address Book entries or
Avoid Areas

Privacy information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC®, SYNC® creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to
SYNC®. In addition, if you connect a media device, SYNC® creates and
retains an index of media content supported by SYNC®. SYNC® also
records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent SYNC® activity. The log profile and other SYNC® data may be
used to improve SYNC® and help diagnose any problems that may occur.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

490

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain
in the vehicle unless you delete it and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use SYNC® or the vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all information stored in SYNC®.
SYNC® data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access
to the vehicle’s SYNC® module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada will not access SYNC® data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist™ (if equipped),
Vehicle Health Report (if equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands.
This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what
is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones,
prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation
and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses
to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the lower
left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (such as
Listening, Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

491

How to Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon. After the tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time.
“Cancel”
“Exit”
“Go back”
“List of commands”
“Main menu”
“Next page”
“Previous page”
“What can I say?”
“Help”
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands for the current session, do one
of the following:
• During a voice session, press the Help icon (?) in the lower left status
bar of the screen.
• Say, “What can I say?” for an on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say, “Help” to hear a list of
possible voice commands.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

492

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Accessing a List of Available Commands
• If you use the touchscreen, press the Settings icon > Help > Voice
Command List.
• If you use the steering wheel control, press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command clearly.
Voice command list
“Audio list of commands”
“Bluetooth audio list of commands”
“Browse list of commands”
“CD list of commands”
“Climate control list of commands”
“List of commands”
“Navigation list of commands”*
“Phone list of commands”
“Radio list of commands”
“SD card list of commands”
“Sirius satellite list of commands”**
“Travel link list of commands”*
“USB list of commands”
“Voice instructions list of commands”
“Voice settings list of commands”
“Help”
*

This command is only available when your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot.
**
This command is only available when you have an active SIRIUS
satellite radio subscription.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction,
help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction that uses
candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest
level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

493

Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to
confirm your voice request. If turned off, the system simply makes a best
guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask
you to confirm settings.
Phone/Media Candidate Lists: Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The system creates these lists when
it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command.
To access these settings using the touchscreen:
1. Press theSettings icon > Settings > Voice Control.
2. Select from:
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice commands:
Press the voice icon. Wait for the prompt “Please say a
command”. Another tone sounds to let you know the system is
listening.
Voice settings using voice commands
“Interaction Mode Novice”
“Interaction Mode Advanced”
“Confirmation Prompts On”
“Confirmation Prompts Off”
“Phone Candidate Lists On”
“Phone Candidate Lists Off”
“Media Candidate Lists On”
“Media Candidate Lists Off”
“Help”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

494

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and making on-screen selections. This is
most often available when using navigation.
Buttons outlined in blue indicate selections that are part of the dual
mode feature. For example, if while you are in a voice session rather
than saying the command “Enter Street Name” to change the field, you
can press Street and the voice session does not end. Instead, the voice
system changes to the Street field and asks you to say the street name.
You cannot use the buttons not outlined in blue as voice commands.
If they are touched during a voice session, the voice session ends.
For example, you can choose from the following on the Navigation home
screen:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest (POI)
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• Cancel Route.
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“DESTINATION”
“Destination my home”
“Destination street address”
“Destination favorites”
“Destination previous destinations”
“Destination POI”
“Destination intersection”
“Destination emergency”
If you choose Street Address from the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• Number
• City
• Street Name
• State/Prov.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

495

Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“STREET ADDRESS”
“Enter house number”
“Change house number”
“Enter street name”
“Change street name”
“Enter city”
“Change city”
“Enter state”
“Change state”
If you choose Points of Interest from the navigation screen, you can
choose from the following:
• Search Area
• Search By Name
• Fuel Station
• ATM
• All Restaurants
• Accommodations
• Parking.
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“POINTS OF INTEREST” or “POI”
“Destination ”
“Search by name”
“Search by category”
“Change search area”
Note: These are just a sample of the voice commands available within
the Points of Interest section; the categories themselves are also
technically voice commands.
If you choose Intersection from the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• 1st Street
• 2nd Street
• City
• State/Prov.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

496

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“INTERSECTION”
“Enter first street name”
“Change first street name”
“Enter second street name”
“Change second street name”
“Enter city”
“Change city”
“Enter state”
“Change state”
The dual mode feature is also available when the voice system displays a list
of items to pick from during a voice session, where you would be able to
touch the line item or say “Line 2”. If the system does not understand a
voice command, or there are multiple options, the system displays a voice
command list for you.
ENTERTAINMENT

A
B
C

G

D
E
F

A. AM 1 and AM AST
B. FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST
C. SIRIUS
D. CD
E. USB

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

H

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

497

F. Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as:
• SD Card
• BT Stereo
• A/V In
G. These buttons change with the media mode you are in.
H. Radio memory presets and CD controls.
Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an
authorized dealer for more information.
You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you can browse through other
devices without having to change sources. For example, if you are
currently listening to audio on an SD card, you can browse all the artists
that are stored on your USB device.
Press the voice icon on the steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:
“BROWSE” within Devices
“Browse”*
“Browse  games”
“Browse  channels”
“Browse CD track list”
“Browse Sirius channel guide”
“Browse SD card”
“Browse USB”
“Help”
*
If you have said “Browse”, you can then say any commands in the
following chart.
**
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
SIRIUS satellite radio.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

498

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

“BROWSE”
“ games”
” channels”
“CD track list”
“SD card”
“Sirius channel guide”
“USB”
“Help”
*
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
SIRIUS satellite radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the “SD card and
USB Port” section of this chapter.
For a complete list of “Browse” voice commands, see USB and SD card
voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the
following sections.
Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple
voice command. For example, if you are listening to music on a USB
device, then want to switch to a satellite radio channel, simply press the
voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the
SIRIUS station (such as, “the Highway”). The following voice commands
are available at the top level of the voice session no matter which
current audio source you are listening to (such as a USB device or
SIRIUS satellite radio). Note: This is only available when your MyFord
Touch system language is set to North American English.
“AM <530 - 1710>”
“<530 - 1710>”
“Sirius <0-223>”*
“Play [genre] ”**
“Play [artist] ”**
“Play [album] ”**

“FM <87.7 – 107.9>”
“<87.7 – 107.9>”
“”*
“Play [playlist] ”**
“Play [song] ”**
“Play  by
”
“Play ”
“Sports games”*
*
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
SIRIUS satellite radio.
**
The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is
optional. For example, if you say, “Play Metallica”, this is the same as the
voice command, “Play [artist] ”.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

499

AM and FM
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets, just touch the AM or
FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button
illuminates when the feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station.
The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music you
would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for
the stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display allows you to view the information broadcast by FM
stations.
AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest
stations in your current location.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

500

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

TAG Button is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a
song to download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen
when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information of
the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player,
the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you
would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives.
Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information,
and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
HD) logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid
when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify
available digital channels where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and
digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only
available digitally.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

501

TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on. To turn the feature on
and use it:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the song’s information and transfers
it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it
to the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your
player (if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the tags
appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to tag up to
approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging,
see www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does
not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if
the station has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory
preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the
sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to
reacquire the digital signal.
• Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the
saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

502

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area

Station blending

Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2 through HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted
unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
When the system first receives a station
(aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it
first plays the station in the analog version.
Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the
shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to
report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting
with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each
station. These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Issue
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.

Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.

503

Potential station issues
Cause
Action
This is poor time
No action required.
alignment by the radio This is a broadcast
broadcaster.
issue.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.

Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel
search.

No action required. The
reception issue may
clear up as you
continue to drive.
No action required.
This is normal behavior.
Wait until the audio is
available.

No action required. The
station is not available
in your current
location.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
No action required.
This is normal behavior.

*

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

504

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.9–107.9>”
“FM autoset preset <#>”
“FM preset <#>”
“<87.9–107.9> HD”1
“<530–1710>”
“FM1”
“AM”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“AM <530–1710>”
“FM2”
“AM autoset”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“AM autoset preset <#>”
“HD <#>” 1
“AM preset <#>”
“Preset <#>”
“Radio off”
“Browse”2
“FM”
“Radio on”
“FM <87.9–107.9>”
“Set PTY”
“Tune”3
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”1
“FM autoset”
“Help”
1
If available.
2
If you have said, “Browse”, see Browsing device content earlier in this section.
3
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<87.9–107.9>”
“<87.9-107.9> HD <#>”*
“<530–1710>”
“AM”
“AM <530–1710>”
“AM autoset”
“AM autoset preset <#>”
“AM preset <#>”
“FM”
“FM <87.9–107.9>”
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”*
*
If available.

“FM autoset”
“FM autoset preset <#>”
“FM preset <#>”
“FM1”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“FM2”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“HD <#>”*
“Preset <#>”
“Help”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

505

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then select the
SIRIUS tab.
Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel. Sound returns
when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts
you when it plays again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately
45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current
station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the
current track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the
feature to replay audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan
for the stations playing that category.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

506

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or
reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To use this feature, you need your
initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts allows you to select Artists, Titles and Teams
that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on
other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts. You can
also set all alerts to on or off. When an alert appears on the screen, you
can choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable
Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a
satellite radio channel.
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is required when communicating
with SIRIUS about your account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel
number. Touch Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to see
more categories. Touch the station you want to listen to.
Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations.
Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

507

If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “Sirius”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“Sirius <0–223>”
“”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”

“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“SAT preset <#>”
“Sirius off”
“Sirius on”
“Sports game”*
“Tune”**
“Help”

*

If you have said, “Sports game”, see the following “Sports game” chart.

**

If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“SPORTS GAME”
“Tune to the  game”
“Tune to the  game”
“Tune to the   game”
“Tune to the  game”
“Help”
“TUNE”
“Sirius <0–223>”
“”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Help”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

508

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio
system includes hardware and a
limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your
vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN to
activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is on the
System Information Screen (SR ESN: XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
overload
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
signal
interference and the audio system may mute.
interference
Antenna
obstructions

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

509

SIRIUS troubleshooting tips
Condition
Possible action
Radio requires more
No action required.
than two seconds to
This message should
produce audio for the
disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
There is an internal
If this message does not
system failure.
module or system
clear shortly, or with an
failure present.
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a
fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Invalid Channel.
The channel is no
Tune to another
longer available.
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS at
not include this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal.
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or When you move into an
SIRIUS tower to your
open area, the signal
vehicle antenna.
should return.
Updating.
Update of channel
No action required. The
programming in
process may take up to
progress.
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
Your satellite service is Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
no longer available.
1-888-539-7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
None Found. Check
All the channels in the Use the channel guide
Channel Guide.
selected channels are
to turn off the Lock or
either skipped or
Skip function on that
locked.
station.
Radio display
Acquiring...

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

510

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Radio display
Subscription Updated.

SIRIUS troubleshooting tips
Condition
Possible action
SIRIUS has updated the No action required.
channels available for
your vehicle.

CD
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select
the CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder, if
applicable.
Repeat
Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks on the
disc or turn the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or
turn the feature off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Compression allows you to turn the compression feature on and off.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

511

Browse
Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“CD”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat folder”*

“Repeat off”
“Repeat track”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle CD”*
“Shuffle folder”*
“Shuffle off”
“Help”

*

This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.

SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card Slot
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, press
the card in and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the card to
remove it as this could cause damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this card slot. See Navigation
system later in this chapter for more information.
The slot is located either in the center console
or behind a small access door in the instrument
panel. To access and play music from your card,
press the lower left corner of the touchscreen,
and then select the SD Card tab.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

512

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C,
LLC.

USB Port
The ports are located either in the center
console or behind a small access door in the
instrument panel. To access and play music from
your device, press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the USB tab.
This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks,
flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone, if compatible, you
must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable, which
you can buy from Apple. When you connect the cable to your iPod or
iPhone, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port.
Playing Music from Your Device
Insert your device and select the SD Card or USB tab once the system
recognizes it. You can then select from the following options:
Repeat replays the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle plays music on the selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music allows you to choose music similar to what is currently
playing.
More Info displays information such as current track, artist name,
album and genre.
Options allows you to view and adjust various media settings.
• Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

513

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
• Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings, which is
under Media Player. See Settings.
• Device Information displays software and firmware information
about the currently connected media device.
• Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it
to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all
media on the device.
Browse allows you to view the contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, such as genre, artist or album.
If you want to view song information such as Title, Artist, File, Folder,
Album, and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also touch What’s Playing to hear how the system pronounces
the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “USB” or “SD card”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
“USB” or “SD CARD”
“Play previous song”
“Browse”*
“Next”
“Play similar music”
“Pause”
“Play song ”
“Play”
“Play TV show ”**
“Play album ”
“Play TV show episode ”**
“Play all”
“Play video ”**
“Play artist ”
“Play video podcast ”**
“Play audiobook ”
“Play video podcast episode
”**
“Play author ”
“Play video playlist ”**
“Play composer ”
“Previous”
“Play folder ”
“Repeat all”
“Play genre ”
“Repeat off”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

514

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

“USB” or “SD CARD”
“Play movie ”**
“Repeat one”
“Play music video ”**
“Shuffle”
“Play next song”
“Shuffle off”
“Play playlist ”
“What’s this?”
“Play podcast ”
“Help”
“Play podcast episode ”
*

If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the
system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse. When
prompted, see the following “Browse” chart.
**
This command is only available in USB mode and are
device-dependent.
“BROWSE”
“Album ”
“All albums”
“All artists”
“All audiobooks”
“All authors”
“All composers”
“All folders”
“All genres”
“All movies” *
“All music videos”*
“All playlists”
“All podcasts”
“All songs”
“All TV shows”*
“All video playlists”*

“All video podcasts”*
“All videos”*
“Artist ”
“Audiobook ”
“Author ”
“Composer ”
“Folder ”
“Genre ”
“Playlist ”
“Podcast ”
“TV show ”*
“Video ”*
“Video playlist ”*
“Video podcast ”*
“Help”

*

This command is only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

515

Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including
iPod®, Zune™, plays from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers
embedded in the media files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as
Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone®, (if compatible),
you MUST have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the
USB port.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle’s speakers from
your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
To access, press the lower left corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
“Next song”, “Pause”, “Play” or “Previous song”.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Bluetooth Audio”, then “Next song”,
“Pause”, “Play” or “Previous song”.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

516

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

A/V Inputs
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while your vehicle is moving.
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (such as a
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included)
to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow,
red and white and are located either
behind a small access door on the
instrument panel or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an auxiliary input jack to play music
from your portable music player over your vehicle’s speakers. Plug in
your 1/8 inch (3.5 millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left A/V input
jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select A/V In.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

517

To use the auxiliary input jack feature, make sure that your portable
music player is designed for use with headphones and that it is fully
charged. You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the
other.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two
left A/V input jacks (white or red) inside the center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select either a tuned
FM station or a CD (if there is a CD already loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1⁄2 the
maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your portable music player although it
may be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between
the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone® (if compatible),
you must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the
USB port.
Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. The jack
only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with
a volume control.
• Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes
distortion and reduces sound quality.
• If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problem persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable media player.
• Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control (such
as Play or Pause) over the attached portable media player.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

518

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

PHONE

A
B
C
D
E
F

A. Phone
B. Quick Dial
C. Phonebook
D. History
E. Messaging
F. Settings
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC®. Once you pair
your phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice
commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most
cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following
functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

519

Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair
your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC. This allows you to use
your phone in a hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition
and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen. Find
SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing
process from your device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone’s manual if necessary.
• Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on
the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, confirm that the PIN
provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on
your phone’s capability, see your phone’s manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition
and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen > Settings > BT
Devices > Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone’s user guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC on the screen. The display indicates when the
pairing is successful. The system asks you if you want to download
your phonebook.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on
your phone’s capability, see your phone’s user guide and visit the website.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

520

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Making Calls
Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, “Call ” or say “Dial”, then the desired
number.
To end the call or exit phone mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Call information
appears in the display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by
pressing the phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by
pressing and holding the phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the
following options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call. During an active call, you can also choose to:
• Mute the call
• Put it on hold
• Turn on privacy (returns the call to your cellular phone)
• Join two calls
• End the call.
Quick Dial
Set up favorite contacts from you phonebook or history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously
downloaded phone book. The system places the entries in alphabetical
categories summarized at the top of the screen.
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this feature,
press Phone > Settings > Manage Phonebook > Download photos
from Phonebook > On.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

521

Certain smart phones may support transferring street addresses when
listed with phone book contact information. If your phone supports this
feature, you can select and use these addresses as destinations and save
them as favorites.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC, you can
access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. You can also
choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone does not support
downloading call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of calls made
with the SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using your touchscreen. See Text messaging later in
this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone settings, such turning
Bluetooth on and off, managing your phonebook and more. See Phone
settings later in this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not
available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth, read them
aloud and translate text messaging acronyms, such as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen (speaker icon)
• Dial
• Send Text
• View
• Delete.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

522

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It is unavailable when your
vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book.
4. You can select from the following options:
• Send which sends the message as it is.
• Edit Text allows you to customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify the recipient as well as update the
message list, and send it to a connected device (such as a USB drive).
Pre-defined Text Message Options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

523

Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your
phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the message to you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 5 mph
(8 km/h), the system offers to read the message to you instead of
allowing you to view it while driving.
Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go directly to your voice mail and
not ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
911 Assist
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See 911 Assist in the SYNC
Services and Applications section.
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call. Choose
from possible system ring tones, your currently paired phone’s ring tone,
a beep, text-to-speech or a silent notification.
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if supported by your phone. Choose
from possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

524

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your internet data
connection. Select to make your connection profile with the personal
area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to
adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect
when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in
roaming mode.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel control. After the
tone, say any of the following commands:
“PHONE”
“Bluetooth off”
“Bluetooth on”
“Call”
“Call ”
“Call  at home”
“Call  at work”
“Call  on cell”
“Call  on other”
“Call voicemail”
“Dial”
“Do not disturb off”
“Do not disturb on”
“Forward text messages”
“Go to hands free”*

“Hold call off”*
“Hold on”*
“Join calls”*
“Listen to text message <#>”
“Listen to text messages”
“Messages”**
“Mute call”*
“Pair phone”
“Privacy on”*
“Reply to text messages”
“Turn ringer off”
“Turn ringer on”
“Unmute call”*
“Help”

*

This command is only available during an active call.
If you have said “Messages”, see the following “Messages” chart.

**

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

525

“MESSAGES”
“Call”
“Forward text messages”
“Listen to text message <#>”
“Listen to text messages”
“Reply to text messages”
“Help”
INFORMATION
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.

A
B
C
D
E

Under the Information menu, you can access features, such as:
A. SYNC Services
B. SIRIUS Travel Link
C. Alerts
D. Calendar
E. SYNC Applications.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

526

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Phone
earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors,
changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle’s current location, travel direction and
speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches you request. Further, to provide the services you request, for
continuous improvement, the service may collect and record call details and
voice communications. For more information, see SYNC Services Terms and
Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want Ford or its service
providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information
identified in the Terms and Conditions, do not subscribe or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

527

Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls.
1. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing
call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can also
say, “What are my choices?” to receive a list of available services
from which to choose.
3. Say, “Services” to return to the Services main menu or for help, say,
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Services.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can also
say, “What are my choices?” to receive a list of available services
from which to choose.
3. Say, “Services” to return to the Services main menu or for help, say,
“Help”.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

528

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
Search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business Search” and then “Search Near
Me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location, you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. The system may prompt you to speak with
an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request. The
live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or
by category, residential addresses by street address or by name or
specific street intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more information on Operator
Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination. After the route
download is finished, the phone call automatically ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the information display, in the
status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services
screen. You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view
the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA. You can
also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or update the
route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and the system delivers a new
route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, SYNC Services downloads
your requested destination to the navigation system. The navigation
system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions.
See the Navigation system section for more information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

529

Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
Personalizing

Push to interrupt

Portable

SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points, such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category.
You can learn more about personalization by
logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Press the voice button at any time (while
connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt
a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a
sports report) and say your voice command.
Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number,
not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
You can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.

SYNC Services Voice Commands
When a route has been downloaded (non-navigation systems),
press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When
prompted, say any of the following commands:
“SERVICES”
“Cancel route”
“Navigation voice off”
“Navigation voice on”
“Next turn”
“Route status”
“Route summary”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

530

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
“SERVICES”
“Services”
“Update route”
“Help”

SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped and If Activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and click on Coverage map and
details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS Travel
Link.
Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible for any errors or
inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

531

Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if
programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s
location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if
available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the
five day forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to see the weather
map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. Select
Area to select from a listing of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports.
You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score
automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and, when
prompted, say any of the following:
Travel Link voice commands
“5–day weather forecast”
“Sports scores”*
“Fuel prices”
“Traffic”
“Movie listings”
“Travel Link”**
“Sports headlines”*
“Weather”
“Weather map”
“Sports schedule”*

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

532

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

*

If you have said, “Sports headlines”, “Sports schedule” or “Sports
scores”, you may say any of the commands in the “Sports headlines,
Sports schedules and Sports scores” commands chart:

**

If you have said, “Travel Link”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Travel Link” chart:
Sports headlines, sports schedules and sports scores voice
commands
“Baseball”
“My teams”
“College basketball”
“NBA”
“College football”
“NFL”
“Golf”
“NHL”
“MLS”
“WNBA”
“Motor sports”
“5–day weather
forecast”
“Baseball headlines”
“Baseball schedule”
“Baseball scores”
“College basketball
headlines”
“College basketball
schedule”
“College basketball
scores”
“College football
headlines”
“College football
schedule”
“College football
scores”
“Fuel prices”
“Golf headlines”
“Golf leaderboard”

“TRAVEL LINK”
“Golf schedule”

“NBA scores”

“MLS headlines”
“MLS schedule”
“MLS scores”
“Motor sports”

“NFL headlines”
“NFL schedule”
“NFL scores”
“NHL headlines”

“Motor sports order”

“NHL schedule”

“Motor sports
schedule”
“Movie listings”

“NHL scores”

“My team headlines”

“Weather”

“My teams schedule”

“Weather map”

“My teams scores”
“NBA headlines”
“NBA schedule”

“WNBA headlines”
“WNBA schedule”
“WNBA scores”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

“Traffic”

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

533

Alerts
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle
is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any of the following services:
• View the message.
• Delete the message.
• Delete All messages.
This screen displays any system messages (such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information
icon yellow. After you read or delete the messages, the icon returns to
white.
Calendar
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist® (If Equipped)
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a
crash, the system will not dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time, which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

534

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the
phone, which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911
Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, that setting applies for all
paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice message plays or
a display message (or icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle is
started after a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about
the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Apps > 911 Assist, > On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings > Phone > 911
Assist, or
• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911 Assist.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

535

To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone
to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United
States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services if 911 Assist triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a
pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s)
in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems
are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a
crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and
connected to the system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

536

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace, normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your
vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system,
(such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

537

The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable
information, such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that
still need servicing.
Making a Report
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
If you want to run a report by using the touchscreen, touch Apps >
Vehicle Health Report.
To run a report by voice command, press the voice button on
the steering wheel and, when prompted, say “Vehicle health
report”.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may
collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information. Ford
may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do
not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information,
do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement) for more
information.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

538

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SETTINGS

A
B
C
D
E
F

A. Clock
B. Display
C. Sound
D. Vehicle
E. Settings
F. Help
Under this menu, you can set your clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for
specific modes or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a
GPS signal to update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may
take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time.
1. Press theSettings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and − to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments, such as 12– or
24–hour mode, activate GPS time synchronization and have the system
automatically update for daylight savings time and new time zones.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

539

You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off. It
appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next to the time and date.
The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings.
Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by
pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when
prompted, say, “Display settings”.
Press the Settings icon > Display, then select from the
following:
Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the
system automatically change based on the outside light level.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning the
display’s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim
Manual Offset feature.
Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from your camera. You must
access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an
SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536)
may not be compatible and appear as a blank (black) image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
To access, press theSettings icon > Display > Edit Wallpaper, and then
follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.
Only the photograph(s), which meets the following conditions, display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

540

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Sound
Press the Settings icon > Sound, then select from the
following:

Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade

Sound Settings
DSP*
Occupancy Mode*
Speed Compensated Volume

*

If equipped.

Vehicle
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle, then select from the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Active Park Assist
Ambient Lighting
Vehicle Health Report
Door Keypad Code
Rear View Camera
Enable Valet Mode.

Active Park Assist
When activated, your system displays directions for you regarding the
active park assist process.
For complete information on this system, see Active park assist in the
Driving Aids chapter.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When activated, ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and make adjustments:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the power button.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

541

Vehicle Health Report
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at
which you would like to receive the reports. Press ? for more information
on these selections.
When done making your selections, press Run Vehicle Health Report
Now if you want your report.
Door Keypad Code
To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Door Keypad Code.
2. Enter your current factory code, then, when prompted, enter your
new code.
Rear View Camera
This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera.
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Rear View Camera, then select
from the following settings:
• Rear Camera Delay
• Visual Park Aid Alert
• Guidelines.
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If the system locks, and you need to reset the PIN, enter 3681 and
the system unlocks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible
until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Enable Valet Mode.
2. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.
After you press Continue, the system locks until you enter the PIN again.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice features, as well as phone,
navigation and wireless settings.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

542

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

System
Press the Settings icon > Settings > System, then select from
the following:
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in
English, Spanish or French.
Distance
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Temperature
System Prompt
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the
Volume
system.
Touch Screen Button Select to have the system beep to confirm
Beep
choices made through the touchscreen.
Touch Panel Button
Select to have the system beep to confirm
Beep
button choices made through the climate or
audio system.
Keyboard Layout
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in
QWERTY or ABC format.
Install Applications
Install any downloaded applications or view
the current software licenses.
Master Reset
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases
all personal settings and personal data.
Language

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

543

Voice Control
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice Control, then
select from the following:
Voice control
Standard interaction mode provides more
detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced
mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation
Have the system ask you short questions if it
Prompts
has not clearly heard or understood your
request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned
off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
Candidate lists are possible results from your
Media Candidate
voice commands. The system simply makes a
Lists
best guess at your request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate
Candidate lists are possible results from your
Lists
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned off.
Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system’s voice
volume level.
Interaction Mode

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

544

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Media Player
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Media Player, then select
from the following:

Autoplay

Bluetooth Devices

Gracenote Database
Info
Gracenote Mgmt

Cover Art Priority

Media player
When this feature is on, the system
automatically switches to the media source
upon initial connection. This allows you to
listen to music during the indexing process.
When this feature is off, the system does not
automatically switch to the inserted media
source.
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a
device. You can also set a device as your
favorite so that the system automatically
attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
This allows you to view the version level of
the Gracenote Database.
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database
supplies metadata information for your music
files. This overrides information from your
device. This feature defaults to off.
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database
supplied cover art for your music files.
This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

545

Navigation
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation, then select
from the following:

Map Preferences

Route Preferences

Navigation
Preferences
Traffic Preferences

Avoid Areas

Navigation
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to
bottom or bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Have the system display the shortest route,
fastest route or ecological route.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle
lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.
Have the system automatically fill-in
State/Province information.
Have the system display areas where
roadwork occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult
driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow
and ice on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be
reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic
announcements.
Enter specific areas that you would like to
avoid on planned navigation routes.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

546

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Phone Settings
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Phone, then select from
the following:

Bluetooth Devices
Bluetooth
Do Not Disturb

911 Assist

Phone Ringer

Text Message
Notification
Internet Data
Connection

Manage Phonebook

Roaming Warning

Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as
well as save it as a favorite.
Turn Bluetooth on and off.
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and
not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature
turned on, text message notifications are also
suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.
See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and
services section.
Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be
silent.
Select the type of notification for text messages
- alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be
silent.
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust
your internet data connection. Select to make
your connection profile with the personal area
network or to turn off your connection. You can
also choose to adjust your settings or have the
system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more
information.
Access features, such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Have the system alert you when in Roaming
mode.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

547

Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that creates a wireless network within
your vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (such as personal computers
or phones) in your vehicle to speak to each other, share files or play
games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection
inside your vehicle, your phone supports personal area networking and if
you park outside a wireless hotspot.
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Wireless & Internet,
then select from the following:

Wi-Fi Settings

Wireless & Internet
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the
Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make
sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to
use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority
and signal strength. You can also choose to
search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more
information, prioritize a network or delete a
network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes
SYNC an access point for a phone or a
computer when turned on. This forms the
local area network within your vehicle for
things, such as game playing, file transfer
and internet browsing. Press ? for more
information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows
you to view and change settings for using
SYNC as the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List
allows you to view recent connections to your
Wi-Fi system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

548

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Wireless & Internet
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also
use a USB mobile broadband connection to
access the internet. (You must turn on your
mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your
typical area for your USB mobile broadband
connection. (USB mobile broadband settings
may not display if the device is already on.)
You can select the following: Country, Carrier,
Phone Number, User Name and Password.
Bluetooth Settings
Shows you the currently paired devices as
well as giving you your typical Bluetooth
options to connect, disconnect, set as favorite,
delete and add device. Bluetooth is a
registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Prioritize
Choose your connection methods and change
Connection Methods them as needed. You can select to Change
Order and have the system either always
attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
USB Mobile
Broadband

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

549

Help
Press the Settings icon > Help, then select from the following:
Help
View your vehicle’s current location, if your vehicle is
equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not
equipped with navigation, nothing displays.
System
Touchscreen system serial number.
Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN).
Touchscreen system software version.
Navigation system version.
Map database version.
Sirius satellite radio electronic serial
number (ESN).
Gracenote Database Information and Library version.
Software
View the licenses for any software and applications
Licenses
installed on your system.
Driving
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is
Restrictions
moving.
911 Assist
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See 911
Assist in the SYNC applications and services section.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Speed Dial allows you
to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick
access if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access
your phonebook and then select the desired contacts.
The numbers then appear as options on this screen for
the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you
select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
Voice Command View categorized lists of voice commands.
List
Where Am I?

To access Help using the voice commands, press the voice button,
then, after the tone, say “Help”. The system provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

550

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

CLIMATE
Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate
control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package,
your climate screen may look different from the screen shown here.

A

K

B

J

C
I

H

G

F

E

D

A. Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot
enter your vehicle when you switch off the system.
B. Passenger settings:
• Touch DUAL to switch on the passenger temperature control.
• Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
• Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat. See the Seats
chapter.
• If your vehicle is equipped with cooled seats, touch the cooled seat
icon to control the cooled seat. See the Seats chapter.
C. Fan speed: Touch + or – to adjust fan speed.
D. Recirculated air: Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which:
• May reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior.
• May help reduce odors from reaching the interior.
• Engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected.
• May be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost.
• May turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce fog
potential.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

551

E. MAX A/C: Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air. Touch
again for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C:
• Distributes air through instrument panel vents.
• Is more economical and efficient than normal A/C mode.
• May help reduce odors from entering your vehicle.
F. A/C: Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off.
• Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
• Engages automatically in MAX A/C, defrost and floor/defrost.
G. AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the temperature
using the temperature control. The system automatically controls:
• Fan speed
• Airflow distribution
• A/C on or off
• Outside or recirculated air.
H. Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated
mirrors.
I. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch
again to return to the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost:
• Provides outside air to reduce window fogging.
• Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents.
J. Manual controls: Select any of the following airflow distribution modes:
• Floor and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster
vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and provides
outside air to reduce window fogging.
• Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
• Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
• Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear
seat floor vents.
K. Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you
may have the following features:
• Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
• Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat. See the Seats
chapter.
• If your vehicle is equipped with cooled seats, touch the cooled seat
icon to control the cooled seat. See the Seats chapter.
• Touch and hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like your
vehicle to remember and maintain for you.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

552

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Climate Control Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available at the main menu
level of a voice session. For example, press the voice button
and after the prompt, “Say a command”; say any of the
following commands:
Climate control voice commands
“Climate automatic”
“Climate my temperature”
“Climate off”
“Climate on”
“Climate temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees”
“Climate temperature <60–85> degrees”
“Help”
There are additional climate control commands but in order to access
them, you have to say “Climate” first, then when the system is ready to
listen, you may say any of the following commands:
Additional climate control voice commands
“Automatic”
“Panel off”
“A/C off”
“Panel on”
“A/C on”
“Rear defrost off”
“Defrost off”
“Rear defrost on”
“Defrost on”
“Recirc off”
“Dual off”
“Recirc on”
“Fan decrease”
“Temperature”*
“Fan increase”
“Temperature <15.5–29.5>
degrees”
“Floor on”
“Temperature <60–85> degrees”
“Max A/C off”
“Temperature decrease”
“Max A/C on”
“Temperature high”
“My temp”
“Temperature increase”
“Off”
“Temperature low”
“On”
“Windshield floor on”
“Panel floor on”
“Help”
*
If you have said “Temperature”, you can say any of the commands in the
following “Temperature” chart.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

553

“TEMPERATURE”
“High”
“Low”
“<15.5–29.5> degrees”
“<60–85> degrees”
“Help”
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate
the navigation system. If you need a replacement SD card, see your
authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, just
push the card in and release it. Do not attempt to pull the card out to
remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination
mode and map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner of your touchscreen, then
Dest when it appears. See Setting a destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your vehicle’s current location, touch the
green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen, or, press
Dest > Map. See Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen, then Dest when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination Selections
My Home
Street Address
Favorites
Intersection
Previous Destinations
City Center
Point of Interest
Map
Emergency
Edit Route Cancel Route
Previous Starting Point
Freeway Entrance/Exit
Latitude/Longitude

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

554

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

1. Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields (in
any order). For address destination entry, Go! appears once you
enter all the necessary information. Pressing Go! makes the address
location appear on the map. If you choose Previous Destination,
the last 20 destinations you have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your destination. You can also
choose to set this as a waypoint (have the system route to this point
on the way to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. The
system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types of routes, and then select
Start Route.
• Fastest Route: Uses the fastest moving roads possible.
• Shortest Route: Uses the shortest distance possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you.
Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways,
tollroads, ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes. (High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes. People who ride in buses, vanpools
or carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the
Start Route button, the system defaults to the Fastest Route option
and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon that
appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) if you want the
system to repeat route guidance information. When the system repeats
the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next
guidance instruction, since it detects when the vehicle is moving.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

555

Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Your system offers a variety of points of interest categories.
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine

Main categories
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services

Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Automobile Dealership
Government Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in front of the point of interest
listing.
When programming a point of interest destination, the system allows you
to sort the resulting lists alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

556

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

cityseekr (If Available)
Note: cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximately
154 cities (132 in the United States, 13 in Canada and 9 in Mexico).
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.

When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information
appear, such as address and phone number. If cityseekr lists the point of
interest, more information is available, such as a brief description, hotel
check-in and checkout times or restaurant hours.
Press More Information for a longer review, a list of services and
facilities, the average room or meal price as well as the website link.
This screen displays point of interest icons, such as:
Hotel

Coffeehouse

Food & Drink

Nightlife

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

557

Attraction

This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.

When you are viewing more information for hotels, cityseekr also tells
you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons.
Hotel services and facilities

Restaurant

24 Hr Room Service

Business Center

Fitness Center

Handicap Facilities

Internet Access

Laundry

Pool

Refrigerator

Wi-Fi

For restaurants, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating,
average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website
address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and check-out times, hotel service icons and
website address.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

558

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route.
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation.
When you select:
Map Preferences

Route Preferences

Navigation
Preferences

You can:
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to
bottom or bottom to top.
Set the automatic parking points of interest
notification.
When parking points of interest notification is
on, the icons display on the map when you
get close to your destination. (This may not
be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest
display.)
Choose to have the system display the
shortest route, fastest route or most
ecological route.
Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car
trains when planning your route.
Use high-occupancy vehicle lanes
(if available).
Choose prompts to be either voice or tone
only.
Have the system automatically fill in the state
and province based on the information
already entered into the system.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
When you select:
Traffic Preferences

Avoid Areas

559

You can:
Choose how you want the system to handle
traffic problems along your route.
Automatic: Have the system reroute you to
avoid traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route (no notification is
provided).
Manual: Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic incidents
along the planned route. You have a choice to
accept or ignore the notification before
making the route deviation.
Turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map (such as road work, incident, accidents
and closed roads).
Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you. Press
Add to select a category.
Once you select, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a
selection, choose the listing on the screen.
When the screen changes to Avoid Areas
Edit, you can press Delete at the bottom
right of the screen.

Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view
map mode. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D
city maps as well as 3D landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use and
land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential
cities around the globe. These maps also contain features, such as town
blocks, building footprints, and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically
recognizable and have a certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks appear
in 3D map mode only. Coverage varies, and improves with updated map
releases.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

560

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Change the appearance of the map
display by repeatedly pressing the
arrow button in the upper left
corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes:
Heading up, North up, and 3D.

Heading up (2D map) always shows the direction of forward travel
to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up
to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers this setting for
larger map scales, but shows the map in North up only. If the scale
returns below this level, the system restores Heading up.
North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated
180 degrees by dragging your finger along the shaded bar with
arrows at the bottom of the map.
Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll
the map away from your vehicle’s current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode, then select the + or - zoom
button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen.
When you press Auto, Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale. The map zoom level
then synchronizes with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle is
traveling, the farther in the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle is
traveling, the farther the map zooms out. To turn the feature off, just
press the + or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the
shaded bar with the arrows.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

561

Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle. It
stays in the center of the map display, except when in scroll
mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the fixed icon is in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor
is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by
any method other than the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons indicate locations of any point
of interest categories you choose to display on the map. You can
choose to display about 56 point of interest subcategories on the
map at one time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.

Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map.
The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on
the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

562

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select:
Set as Dest

Set as Waypoint
Save to Favorites
POI Icons On/Off

Cancel Route
View/Edit Route

You can:
Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. (You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then touch Set as Dest.)
Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save the current location to your favorites.
Select icons to display on the map. You can
select up to three icons to display on the map
at the same time.
Cancel the active route.
Access these features when a route is active:
• View route
• Edit destination/waypoints
• Edit turn list
• Detour
• Edit route preferences
• Edit traffic preferences
• Cancel route.

Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call 01–800–557–5539) or
going to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

563

Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. After the tone, say any of the following
commands:
Navigation system voice commands
“Navigation”3
“Cancel next waypoint”1
1
“Cancel route”
“Navigation voice volume
decrease”1
“Destination”2
“Navigation voice volume increase”
“Destination ”
“Repeat instruction”
“Destination ”
“Show 3D”
“Destination favorites”
“Show heading up”
“Destination home”
“Show map”
“Destination intersection”
“Show north up”
“Destination nearest ”
“Destination nearest POI”
“Show turn list”1
“Destination play nametags”
“Voice guidance off”
“Destination POI”
“Voice guidance on”
“Destination POI category”
“Where am I?”
“Destination previous destination”
“Zoom in”
“Destination street address”
“Zoom out”
“Help”
“Detour”1
1
This command is only available when a navigation route is active.
2
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
3
If you have said the command, “Navigation”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart.
“DESTINATION”
“”
“”
“Favorites”
“Home”
“Intersection”

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

564

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
“DESTINATION”
“Nearest ”
“Nearest POI”
“Play nametags”
“POI category”
“Previous destination”
“Street address”
“Help”
“NAVIGATION”
“Destination”*
“Zoom city”
“Zoom country”
“Zoom in minimum”
“Zoom out maximum”
“Zoom province”
“Zoom state”
“Zoom street”
“Zoom to ”
“Help”

*

If you have said, “Destination”, you may say any of the commands in the
Destination chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either “Navigation destination street address” or
“Destination street address”, the system asks you to say the full address.
The system displays an example on-screen. You can then speak the
address naturally, such as “One two three four Main Street, Anytown”.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

565

GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates (“FORD MOTOR COMPANY”) from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software products
of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or
electronic documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may
be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional
software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. The
additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin,
as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as ⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA
(OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

566

Appendices

DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

567

• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to
provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

568

Appendices

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

569

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

570

Appendices

No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe
Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash®
Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright 娀 1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC.
All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

571

Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while
you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to
access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention
has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

572

Appendices

Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please
make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

573

TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a
risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require
your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the
following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and
otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving.
If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or
directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such
instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the
TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not
use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary
for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that
they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation
of any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav
Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to
comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide
TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about
yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such
information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

574

Appendices

3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to
use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and
use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination
or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav
Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio
library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express
written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter,
any of TeleNav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software
in any manner that (i) infringes the intellectual property or proprietary
rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates
any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable;
and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third
parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

575

or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR
GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

576

Appendices

6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The
arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American
Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is
no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial action is
necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you
agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice,
provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav
and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav
Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by
implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and
its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

577

8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav
all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required
disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices
by posting them on TeleNav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to
your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive
Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav
Software.
8.4 TeleNav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision
shall not affect that party’s right to require performance at any time
thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of
the provision itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will
be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference
only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be
referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words “include” and
“including,” and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of
limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to TeleNav’s third party vendor licensors:

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

578

Appendices

NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this package,
or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the terms of this
agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use, resell or transfer
the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement, and have not
installed, copied, or used the Data, you must contact your retailer or
NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) within thirty (30) days of purchase for
a refund of your purchase price. To contact NT, please visit www.navteq.com.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including: 娀 Her Majesty the Queen in Right
of Canada, 娀 Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀 Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase ®.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service ®
to publish and sell ZIP+4 ® information.
娀 United States Postal Service ® 2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service ®. The
following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal,
noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or
other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree
not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

579

License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis
if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on
use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a)
use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to
use it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any
kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be
obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted
or error free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions,
so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

580

Appendices

Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA;
OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS,
OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain
liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may
not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of
the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors
and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree
to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and
all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the
Data provided to you hereunder.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

581

Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of
the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this
Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”)
2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and
each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use”, and be treated
in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify
NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

582

Appendices

Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from
online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions
of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign,
copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide, including any copyrighted
material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its
respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company’s own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND
THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.” NEITHER
GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Appendices

583

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE
COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE,
CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU
WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE
MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007
Vehicle with SYNC only
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 IC: 1422A-SG1G1
FCC ID: WDGSG1G1 IC: 5248B-SG1G1
Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

584

Index

911 Assist™ ......................455, 533

Air filter .....................................341

A

All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................220

ABS (see Brakes) .....................235
Accessing and using your
USB port ....................................511
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............444
Accessing your calendar ..........533
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................469
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................446
Accessory belt ...........................397
Accessory delay ........................100
Active call menu options .........444
Adding (pairing) a phone ........519
Advanced menu options ...453, 476
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................453
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................52
and child safety seats ..............53
description ................................52
disposal ......................................64
driver airbag ..............................52
passenger airbag .......................52
side airbag ...........................52, 60
Air cleaner filter .............338–339,
341, 405
Air conditioning ................153, 155
manual heating and air
conditioning system .......153, 155

Ambient mood/lighting .....540–541
Ambulance packages ..................16
AM/FM .......................................499
Antifreeze (see Engine
coolant) .....................................326
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................235
Anti-theft system ..................82, 84
arming the system ..............82, 84
disarming a triggered system ..84
AppLink™ .................................464
Armrests ....................................179
Audio system
CD-MP3 ...................................138
Single CD ................137, 142, 147
Audio system
(see Radio) ........137–138, 142, 147
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................210
fluid, adding ............................332
fluid, checking ........................332
fluid, refill capacities ..............399
fluid, specification ..................399
Selectshift (SST) ....................212
Auxiliary Input Jack .................508
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..148
Auxiliary powerpoint ................190
A/V inputs ..........................150, 516
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........399
refill capacities ........................399

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Index
B
Battery .......................................334
acid, treating emergencies .....334
jumping a disabled battery ....297
maintenance-free ....................334
replacement, specifications ...405
servicing ..................................334
Bed extender ............................263
Belt-Minder®
deactivating/activating the
Belt-Minder® ............................47
Booster seats ...............................23
Brakes ........................................234
anti-lock ...................................235
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................235
brake warning light ................235
fluid, checking and adding ....333
fluid, refill capacities ..............399
fluid, specifications .................399
lubricant specifications ..........399
parking ....................................235
shift interlock ..................215, 217
trailer .......................................276
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....399
Car2U® Home Automation
System .......................................180
CD ......................137–138, 142, 147
CD player ..........................135, 510
CD voice commands .................511
Cell phone use ............................17
Changing a tire .........................387
Changing the air filter ..............341

585

Child safety seats
attaching with tether straps ....33
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................42
in front seat ..............................28
in rear seat ................................28
LATCH .......................................31
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................23
Cleaning the touchscreen ........487
Cleaning your vehicle ...............350
engine compartment ..............352
exterior ....................................350
instrument panel ............355–356
interior .....................................354
plastic parts ............................352
washing ....................................350
waxing .....................................352
wheels ......................................358
wiper blades ............................353
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ..153, 155
Climate voice commands .........552
Clock ..................137–138, 142, 538
Console ......................................193
Controls
power seat ...............................169
Coolant ......................................326
checking and adding ..............326
refill capacities ........................399
specifications ..........................399
Customer Assistance ................294
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................411
Getting roadside assistance ...294
Getting the service
you need .................................300
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................306

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

586

Index

Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................304
D
Defrost .......................153, 155, 157
rear window ............................161
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................332
engine oil .................................325
Display settings .........................539
Drivebelt ....................................397
Driving under special
conditions ..................218, 229, 231
sand .........................................229
snow and ice ...........................232
through water .................230, 288
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .........................157
E
Electronic message center .......113
Electronic stability control ......238
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................297
running out of fuel .................203
Emission control system ..........207
End user license agreement ....565
Engine ........................................397
cleaning ...................................352
coolant .....................................326
fail-safe cooling .......................329
idle speed control ...................334
lubrication specifications .......399
refill capacities ........................399
service points ..................321–324

Engine block heater .................198
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............325
dipstick ....................................325
filter, specifications ................405
refill capacities ........................399
specifications ..........................399
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................197
F
Fail safe cooling ........................329
Fleet MyKey programming ........71
Floor mats .................................289
Fluid capacities .........................399
Fog lamps ....................................95
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......220
description ..............................223
driving off road .......................227
electronic shift ........................221
indicator light .........................220
Fuel
cap ...........................................205
capacity ...................................399
choosing the right fuel ...201–202
filler funnel .............................203
filling your vehicle with fuel ..205
filter, specifications ................333
fuel pump shut-off ..................296
octane rating ...................202, 397
quality ......................................201
running out of fuel .................203
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................200
Fuel - flex fuel
vehicle (FFV) ............................202
Fuses ..........................308–309, 314

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Index

587

Garage door opener ..........180, 185

Instrument panel
cleaning ...........................355–356
cluster ......................................108

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............205

J

G

Gauges .......................................106
H
Hazard flashers .........................296
HD Radio™ ...............................500
Headlamps ...................................93
aiming ......................................342
autolamp system .......................94
bulb specifications ..................348
checking alignment ................342
flash to pass ..............................93
high beam .................................93
replacing bulbs .......................344
turning on and off ....................93
Head restraints .........................164
Heating ......................153, 155, 157
Help ............................................549
Hill descent mode .....................240
Hill start assist ..........................218
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................185
Hood ..........................................320
How to use voice commands ...491
I
Ignition ...............................195, 397
Illuminated visor mirror ...........104
Information displays .................113
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................209

Jack ............................................387
positioning ...............................387
storage .....................................387
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....444
Jump-starting your vehicle ......297
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................77
keypad .......................................79
locking and unlocking doors ....81
programming entry code .........79
Keys .......................................66, 82
positions of the ignition .........195
L
Lamps ..........................................93
autolamp system .......................94
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................348
fog lamps ...................................95
headlamps .................................93
headlamps, flash to pass ..........93
instrument panel, dimming .....94
interior lamps ...........................96
replacing bulbs ...............344, 348
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................95
LATCH anchors ...........................31
Lights, warning and indicator ..108
Listening to music ....................496

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

588

Index

Loading instructions .................258
Load limits .................................252
Locks
autolock .....................................77
childproof ..................................37
doors ..........................................76
Lubricant specifications ...........399
Lug nuts ....................................396
Lumbar support, seats .............168
M
Making and receiving calls .......520
MAP DVD - Loading and
Unloading ..................................520
Map icons ..................................561
Map mode ..................................559
Map preferences .......................558
Map updates ..............................562
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................475
Message center .................113–114
warning messages ...................126
Mirrors ...............................100, 104
fold away .........................101–102
programmable memory ............67
side view mirrors (power) .....100
signal .......................................102
Moon roof ..................................105
Motorcraft® parts .............350, 405
MyFord Touch™ system ..........484
MyKey ..........................................71

N
Navigation features ...................553
Navigation voice commands ....563
Notifications ..............................533
O
Octane rating ............................202
P
Pairing other phones ........441, 519
Pairing your phone ...................519
Pairing your phone for the
first time ............................441, 519
Parental MyKey programming ...71
Parking brake ............................235
Parts (see Motorcraft®
parts) .........................................405
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................452
Phone redial ..............................446
Phone settings ..................523, 546
Phone voice commands ............524
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist, tracks,
similar) ......................................471
POI categories ...........................555
Point of Interest (POI) .............555
Power deployable running
boards ........................................265

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Index
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) .......................309, 314
Power door locks ........................76
Power mirrors ...........................100
Powerpoint ................................190
Power steering ..........................250
fluid, checking and adding ....333
fluid, refill capacity ................399
fluid, specifications .................399
Power Windows ...........................98
Privacy information ..........437, 489
Putting a call on/off hold .........444
Q
Quick touch buttons .................562
R
Radio ..................137–138, 142, 147
AM/FM .....................................499
CD-MP3 ...................................138
Single CD ................137, 142, 147
Radio reception .........................135
Radio voice commands .............504
Rear heated seats .....................174
Rear view camera
display ................................244, 541
Rear window
defroster ....................153, 155, 157
Receiving a text
message .............................448, 523
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................25
Relays ................................308–309

589

Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................78
locking/unlocking doors ...........76
replacing the batteries .............66
Reverse sensing system ...........243
Roadside assistance ..................294
Roll stability control .................238
Route preferences ....................558
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............48
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..............................40, 44
Safety defects, reporting ..........307
Safety information ............436, 488
Safety restraints ..............40, 42, 44
Belt-Minder® ............................45
Belt-Minder®,
deactivating/activating .............47
extension assembly ..................44
for adults .............................40, 42
for children .........................20, 25
safety belt maintenance ...........48
seat belt maintenance ..............48
warning light and chime ..........45
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ........................................31
Safety seats for children ......20, 25
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................407
Satellite Radio ...........138, 142, 505
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............419
SD card ......................150, 511, 553

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

590

Index

Seat belts (see Safety
restraints) ....................................40
Seats
child safety seats ................20, 25
cleaning ...................................357
climate control ........................178
filter .........................................178
heated ..............................174, 176
memory seat .....................67, 170
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ..........................................79
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................82
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........469
Sending new text messages .....522
Setting a destination ................553
Setting a destination
by voice .....................................553
Settings ......................................538
Setting the
clock ...................137–138, 142, 538
Side air curtain ...........................61
Side-curtain airbags system .......61
SIRIUS® satellite
radio ...........................138, 142, 505
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................506
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................530
SIRIUS Travel Link voice
commands .................................531
Snowplowing ...............16, 290–292
SOS Post Crash Alert .................51
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................397, 405

Special notice
ambulance conversions ............16
four-wheel drive
vehicles ............................292–293
utility-type vehicles ..................16
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................399
Stability system .........................238
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......196
Starting your vehicle ........195–196
jump starting ..........................297
Steering wheel ............................85
controls ......................................87
tilting ...................................85–86
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................52
Supported media file types ......515
Supported player, media
formats and metadata
information ................................515
SYNC® AppLink™ ...................464
SYNC® customer
support ..............................436, 487
SYNC® Services ................460, 526
System settings .........................542
T
Tailgate ......................................259
Temperature control
(see Climate
control) ..............153, 155, 157, 550
Text messaging .................447, 521
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....448, 450
Tilt steering wheel ................85–86

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)

Index
Tires ...........................365–366, 387
alignment ................................379
care ..........................................365
changing ..........................387, 390
checking the pressure ............375
inflating ...................................373
label .........................................372
replacing ..................................377
rotating ....................................379
safety practices .......................378
sidewall information ...............367
snow tires and chains ............380
spare tire .................................388
terminology .............................366
tire grades ...............................366
treadwear ........................365, 375
Touchscreen features
(climate) ....................................550
Towing ...............................267, 283
recreational towing .........284–285
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............276
trailer towing ..........................267
wrecker ....................................283
Traction control ........................236
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................460
Traffic preferences ...................558
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................276
Trailer sway control ..................268
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................332
Transmission
brake-shift interlock
(BSI) ................................215, 217
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................332

591

fluid, refill capacities ..............399
lubricant specifications ..........399
Turn signal ..................................95
U
Universal garage door opener ..180
USB port ....................149–150, 511
Using privacy mode ..................444
V
Vehicle health report ........458, 536
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ...........................406
Vehicle loading ..........................252
Ventilating your vehicle ...........197
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................466
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................442
Voice recognition ......................490
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .....108
Washer fluid ..............................333
Water, Driving through .............288
Windows
power .........................................98
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................91
checking and adding fluid .....333
replacing wiper blades ...........337
Wrecker towing .........................283

2013 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, February 2013
USA (fus)



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : 
Create Date                     : 2013:02:12 10:10:39Z
Language                        : English
Market                          : USA
Modify Date                     : 2013:03:05 16:14:44-05:00
Model Name List                 : f12
Model Year                      : 2013
Pub Date                        : 2013-02
Pubtype                         : Owner Guide
Subject                         : 
Supercedes                      : false
Version                         : 3rd Print
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Keywords                        : 
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Metadata Date                   : 2013:03:05 16:14:44-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Ford
Description                     : 
Creator                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:fc43d52e-e5c5-4733-bef4-8e29031074e9
Instance ID                     : uuid:a37eb8ea-4fca-49c8-a926-6b5c211f326f
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 592

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools